6F3B0253
UM-TS01∗∗∗-E031
PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER
PROSEC T1-16S
USER’S MANUAL
− Basic Hardware and Function −
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
CE Marking
The Programmable Controller PROSEC T1-16S (hereafter called T1-16S) complies with the
requirements of the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC and Low Voltage Directive 72/23/EEC under the
condition of use according to the instructions described in this manual.
The contents of the conformity are shown below.
Application of
EMC : 89/336/EEC (as amended by 91/263/EEC and 92/31/EEC)
Council Directive
LVD : 72/23/EEC (as amended by 93/68/EEC)
Manufacture’s Name
:
:
Toshiba Corporation,
Fuchu Operations-Social Infrastructure Systems
1, Toshiba-Cho
Fuchu-shi
Address
TOKYO 183-8511
Japan
declares, that the product
Product Name
:
:
Programmable Controller , T1-16S
Model Number
TDR116S6S, TDR116S6C
TDR116S3S, TDR116S3C
conforms to the following Product Specifications:
EMC
Radiated Interference
Mains Interference
Radiated Susceptibility
Conducted RFI Susceptibility
Electrostatic Discharge
Electrical Fast Transient
:
:
:
:
:
:
EN 55011 Group 1 Class A
EN 55011 Group 1 Class A
ENV50140
ENV50141, IEC100-4-6.
IEC1000-4-2
IEC1000-4-4
LVD
:
EN61131-2:1995 3.10 Dielectric Properties
4.
Mechanical Requirements
Supplementary information
:
(1) Included Handy Programmer THP911A*S.
(2) Included each type of associated input/output unit in a typical configuration.
(3) Product must be installed in accordance with manufacturers instructions
Basic Hardware and Function 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
UL/c-UL Listing
The Programmable Controller PROSEC T1-16S (hereafter called T1-16S) is UL/c-UL listed as
shown below.
UL and c-UL Listing
File Number :
E95637
Product Name :
Product Covered :
Programmable Controller , T1-16S
Main Unit
TDR116S6S, TDR116S6C,
TDR116S3S, TDR116S3C
I/O module
TDI116M*S, TDD116M*S, TDO116M*S,
TAD121M*S, TAD131M*S, TDA121M*S, TDA131M*S,
TFR112M*S
Peripherals
TRM102**S, TCU111**S, THP911A*S
UL and c-UL Listing For Use in Hazardous Locations
File Number :
E184034
Product Name :
Product Covered :
Programmable Controller , T1-16S
Main Unit
TDR116S6S, TDR116S6C
Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D
Locations Class :
Important Notice :
1. THIS EQUIPMENT IS SUITABLE FOR USE IN CLASS I,
DIVISION 2, GROUPS A, B, C, D OR NON-HAZARDOUS
LOCATIONS ONLY.
2. WARNING - EXPLOSION HAZARD - SUBSTITUTION OF
COMPONENTS MAY IMPAIR SUITABILITY FOR CLASS I,
DIVISION 2.
3. WARNING - EXPLOSION HAZARD - DO NOT DISCONNECT
EQUIPMENT UNLESS POWER HAS BEEN SWITCHED OFF
OR THE AREA IS KNOWN TO BE NON-HAZARDOUS.
2 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
Safety Precautions
This manual is prepared for users of Toshiba’s Programmable Controller T1-16S.
Read this manual thoroughly before using the T1-16S. Also, keep this manual and related
manuals so that you can read them anytime while the T1-16S is in operation.
General Information
1. The T1-16S has been designed and manufactured for use in an industrial
environment. However, the T1-16S is not intended to be used for systems which may
endanger human life. Consult Toshiba if you intend to use the T1-16S for a special
application, such as transportation machines, medical apparatus, aviation and space
systems, nuclear controls, submarine systems, etc.
2. The T1-16S has been manufactured under strict quality control. However, to keep
safety of overall automated system, fail-safe systems should be considered outside
the T1-16S.
3. In installation, wiring, operation and maintenance of the T1-16S, it is assumed that the
users have general knowledge of industrial electric control systems.
If this product is handled or operated improperly, electrical shock, fire or damage to
this product could result.
4. This manual has been written for users who are familiar with Programmable
Controllers and industrial control equipment. Contact Toshiba if you have any
questions about this manual.
5. Sample programs and circuits described in this manual are provided for explaining the
operations and applications of the T1-16S. You should test completely if you use them
as a part of your application system.
Hazard Classifications
In this manual, the following two hazard classifications are used to explain the safety
precautions.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could
result in death or serious injury.
!
!
WARNING
CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may
result in minor or moderate injury. It may also be used to alert
against unsafe practices.
Even a precaution is classified as CAUTION, it may cause serious results depending on
the situation. Observe all the safety precautions described on this manual.
Basic Hardware and Function 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
Safety Precautions
Installation:
!
CAUTION
1. Excess temperature, humidity, vibration, shocks, or dusty and corrosive gas
environment can cause electrical shock, fire or malfunction. Install and use the T1-
16S and related equipment in the environment described in this manual.
2. Improper installation directions or insufficient installation can cause fire or the units
to drop. Install the T1-16S and related equipment in accordance with the instructions
described in this manual.
3. Turn off power before installing or removing any units, modules, racks, terminal
blocks or battery. Failure to do so can cause electrical shock or damage to the T1-
16S and related equipment.
4. Entering wire scraps or other foreign debris into to the T1-16S and related
equipment can cause fire or malfunction. Pay attention to prevent entering them into
the T1-16S and related equipment during installation and wiring.
5. Turn off power immediately if the T1-16S or related equipment is emitting smoke or
odor. Operation under such situation can cause fire or electrical shock. Also
unauthorized repairing will cause fire or serious accidents. Do not attempt to repair.
Contact Toshiba for repairing.
Wiring:
!
CAUTION
1. Turn off power before wiring to minimize the risk of electrical shock.
2. Exposed conductive parts of wire can cause electrical shock. Use crimp-style
terminals with insulating sheath or insulating tape to cover the conductive parts. Also
close the terminal covers securely on the terminal blocks when wiring has been
completed.
3. Operation without grounding may cause electrical shock or malfunction. Connect the
ground terminal on the T1-16S to the system ground.
4. Applying excess power voltage to the T1-16S can cause explosion or fire. Apply
power of the specified ratings described in the manual.
5. Improper wiring can cause fire, electrical shock or malfunction. Observe local
regulations on wiring and grounding.
4 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
Safety Precautions
Operation:
!
WARNING
1. Configure emergency stop and safety interlocking circuits outside the T1-16S.
Otherwise, malfunction of the T1-16S can cause injury or serious accidents.
!
CAUTION
2. Operate the T1-16S and the related modules with closing the terminal covers. Keep
hands away from terminals while power on, to avoid the risk of electrical shock.
3. When you attempt to perform force outputs, RUN/HALT controls, etc. during
operation, carefully check for safety.
4. Turn on power to the T1-16S before turning on power to the loads. Failure to do so
may cause unexpected behavior of the loads.
5. Do not use any modules of the T1-16S for the purpose other than specified. This
can cause electrical shock or injury.
6. Do not modify the T1-16S and related equipment in hardware nor software. This can
cause fire, electrical shock or injury.
7. Configure the external circuit so that the external 24 Vdc power required for
transistor output circuits and power to the loads are switched on/off simultaneously.
Also, turn off power to the loads before turning off power to the T1-16S.
8. Install fuses appropriate to the load current in the external circuits for the outputs.
Failure to do so can cause fire in case of load over-current.
9. Check for proper connections on wires, connectors and modules. Insufficient contact
can cause malfunction or damage to the T1-16S and related equipment.
Basic Hardware and Function 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
Safety Precautions
Maintenance:
!
CAUTION
1. Turn off power before removing or replacing units, modules, terminal blocks or wires.
Failure to do so can cause electrical shock or damage to the T1-16S and related
equipment.
2. When you remove both input and output terminal blocks with wires for maintenance
purpose, pay attention to prevent inserting them upside down.
3. Touch a grounded metal part to discharge the static electricity on your body before
touching the equipment.
4. Otherwise, charged static electricity on your body can cause malfunction or failure.
5. Do not disassemble the T1-16S because there are hazardous voltage parts inside.
6. Perform daily checks, periodical checks and cleaning to maintain the system in
normal condition and to prevent unnecessary troubles.
7. Check by referring “Troubleshooting” section of this manual when operating
improperly. Contact Toshiba for repairing if the T1-16S or related equipment is failed.
Toshiba will not guarantee proper operation nor safety for unauthorized repairing.
8. The contact reliability of the output relays will reduce if the switching exceeds the
specified life. Replace the unit or module if exceeded.
9. The battery used in T1-16S may present a risk of fire of chemical burn if mistreated.
Do not recharge, disassemble, heat above 100ºC (212ºF), or incinerate.
10.Replace battery with CR2032 only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire
or explosion.
11.Dispose of used battery promptly. Keep away from children. Do not disassemble
and do not dispose of in fire.
6 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
Safety Precautions
Safety Label
The safety label as shown on the right is
attached to the power terminal of the
T1-16S.
CAUTION
Do not touch terminals
while power on.
!
Remove the mount paper before wiring.
Hazardous voltage can shock, burn or cause death.
Do not touch terminals while power on.
Read related manual thoroughly for safety.
Stick this seal on unit or near unit.
Peel off the label from the mount paper
and stick it near the power terminals
where it can be readily seen.
Take off this sheet before wiring.
Contact Toshiba if the label is damaged.
Basic Hardware and Function 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
About This Manual
About This Manual
This manual has been prepared for first-time users of Toshiba’s Programmable Controller
T1-16S to enable a full understanding of the configuration of the equipment, and to
enable the user to obtain the maximum benefits of the equipment.
This manual introduces the T1-16S, and explains the system configuration,
specifications, installation and wiring for T1-16S’s basic hardware. This manual provides
the information for designing T1-16S user program, such as the internal operation,
memory configuration, I/O allocation and programming instructions. Information for
maintenance and troubleshooting are also provided in this manual.
The T1-16S’s computer link function and T1-16S’s multi-purpose communication
functions are covered by the separate manual. Read the T1-16S User’s Manual -
Communication Function - for details.
Inside This Manual
This manual consists of 10 main sections and an appendix.
Section 1 outlines the T1-16S configuration. To fully understand the T1-16S, it is
important to read this section carefully. Sections 2, to 4 describe the hardware used in
designing external circuits and panels. Sections 5 to 7 are mainly concerned with
software. Section 8 explains the T1-16S’s special I/O functions. Sections 9 and 10
describe the maintenance procedure for the T1-16S, to ensure safe operation and long
service life.
Related Manuals
The following related manuals are available for T1-16S. Besides this manual, read the
following manuals for your better understanding.
T1-16S User’s Manual
- Basic Hardware and Function - (this manual)
- I/O Modules -
- Communication Function -
UM-TS01∗∗∗-E031
UM-TS01∗∗∗-E034
UM-TS01∗∗∗-E033
UM-TS03∗∗∗-E025
T-Series Handy Programmer (HP911) Operation Manual
T-Series Program Development System (T-PDS) User’s Manual UM-TS03∗∗∗-E045
8 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
About This Manual
Terminology
The following is a list of abbreviations and acronyms used in this manual.
µs
microsecond
ASCII
AWG
BCC
CCW
CPU
CW
American Standard Code For Information Interchange
American Wire Gage
Block Check Code
Counter-Clockwise
Central Processing Unit
Clockwise
EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory
H
hexadecimal (when it appears in front of an alphanumeric string)
I/O
Input/Output
LED
LSB
ms
Light Emitting Diode
Least Significant Bit
millisecond
MSB
PWM
RAM
ROM
Vac
Vdc
Most Significant Bit
Pulse Width Modulation
Random Access Memory
Read Only Memory
AC voltage
DC voltage
Basic Hardware and Function 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
Contents
Contents
Safety Precautions
About This Manual
..................................................................................
..................................................................................
3
8
1.
System Configuration .................................................................... 13
Introducing the T1-16S ................................................................ 14
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.5.1
1.5.2
1.5.3
1.6
1.7
1.8
Features .............................................................................................. 16
System configuration .......................................................................... 19
I/O expansion ...................................................................................... 20
Components ........................................................................................ 21
Basic unit ......................................................................................... 21
I/O modules ...................................................................................... 25
Options ............................................................................................ 26
Programmer port function .................................................................. 27
RS-485 port communication function ................................................. 28
Real-time data link system ................................................................. 32
Peripheral tools .................................................................................. 33
1.9
2.
Specifications .................................................................................. 37
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
General specifications ........................................................................ 38
Functional specifications .................................................................... 40
I/O specifications ................................................................................ 42
External dimensions ........................................................................... 46
3.
I/O Application Precautions .......................................................... 47
3.1
3.2
Application precautions for input signals ............................................ 48
Application precautions for output signals .......................................... 50
4.
Installation and Wiring ................................................................... 53
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
Environmental conditions ................................................................... 54
Installing the unit ................................................................................. 55
Wiring terminals .................................................................................. 57
Grounding ........................................................................................... 58
Power supply wiring ............................................................................ 59
I/O wiring ............................................................................................ 61
10 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
Contents
5.
Operating System Overview ......................................................... 63
5.1
5.2
5.3
Operation modes ................................................................................ 64
About the built-in EEPROM ................................................................ 66
Scanning ............................................................................................. 69
6.
Programming Information ............................................................. 73
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.6.1
6.6.2
6.6.3
6.6.4
6.6.5
6.7
6.8
6.9
6.10
Devices and registers ......................................................................... 74
Index modification ............................................................................... 86
Real-time clock/calendar .................................................................... 88
I/O allocation ....................................................................................... 89
T1-16S memory mode setting.............................................................. 91
User program configuration ................................................................ 92
Main program .................................................................................. 94
Sub-program #1 .............................................................................. 95
Timer interrupt program .................................................................. 95
I/O interrupt programs ..................................................................... 96
Subroutines .................................................................................... 97
Programming language ...................................................................... 98
Program execution sequence ............................................................ 99
On-line debug support functions ........................................................ 100
Password protection ........................................................................... 103
7.
Instructions ...................................................................................... 105
7.1
7.2
List of instructions .............................................................................. 106
Instruction specifications .................................................................... 116
8.
Special I/O Functions .................................................................... 255
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.3.1
8.3.2
8.3.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
Special I/O function overview ............................................................. 256
Variable input filter constant .............................................................. 260
High speed counter ............................................................................ 261
Single phase up-counter ................................................................. 262
Single phase speed-counter ............................................................ 263
Quadrature bi-pulse counter ............................................................ 265
Interrupt input function ........................................................................ 268
Analog setting function ....................................................................... 270
Pulse output function .......................................................................... 271
PWM output function .......................................................................... 273
8.7
9.
Maintenance and Checks .............................................................. 275
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
Precautions during operation ............................................................. 276
Daily checks ........................................................................................ 277
Periodic checks ................................................................................... 278
Maintenance parts ............................................................................... 279
Battery ................................................................................................. 280
Basic Hardware and Function 11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
Contents
10.
Troubleshooting .............................................................................. 281
10.1
10.1.1
Troubleshooting procedure ................................................................ 282
Power supply check ......................................................................... 283
CPU check ....................................................................................... 284
Program check ................................................................................. 284
Input check ....................................................................................... 285
Output check .................................................................................... 286
Environmental problem .................................................................... 287
Self-diagnostic items .......................................................................... 288
10.1.2
10.1.3
10.1.4
10.1.5
10.1.6
10.2
Appendix ......................................................................................................... 293
A.1
A.2
List of models and types ..................................................................... 294
Instruction index ................................................................................. 295
12 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
Section 1
System Configuration
1.1 Introducing the T1-16S, 14
1.2 Features, 16
1.3 System configuration, 19
1.4 I/O expansion, 20
1.5 Components, 21
1.6 Computer link system, 27
1.7 T1-16S Communication function, 28
1.8 Real-time data link system, 32
1.9 Peripheral tools, 33
Basic Hardware and Function 13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
1. System Configuration
1.1 Introducing the T1-16S
The T1-16 is compact, block style, high-performance programmable controller with a
range of 16 to 144 input and output points.
The figure below shows the T1 Series line-up. The T1 Series consists of the total 16
types.
T1 Series
T1
T1-16
T1-MDR16
T1-MAR16
T1-MDR16D
T1-28
T1-40
T1-MDR28
T1-MAR28
T1-MDR28D
T1-MDR40
T1-MAR40
T1-MDR40D
T1S
T1-16S
T1-40S
T1-MDR16SS
T1-MDR16SC
T1-MDR16SSD
T1-MDR16SCD
T1-MDR40S
T1-MAR40S
T1-MDR40SD
I/O points:
The T1 Series are available in five models, T1-16, T1-28, T1-40, T1-40S and T1-
16S. Each model has the following I/O points.
T1-16
T1-16S
T1-28
T1-40
T1-40S
8 points
14 points
24 points
Input
8 points
14 points
16 points
Output
(6 relay plus 2 slid-state)
(12 relay plus (14 relay plus 2 solid-state)
2 slid-state)
No
Up to 8 I/O
modules.
Total up to
144 points.
No
2 option cards plus
1 expansion rack or unit.
Total up to 382 points.
Expansion
The T1-16S can expand its I/O points by connecting I/O modules. Up to eight I/O
modules can be connected. If eight 16-point I/O modules are connected to the T1-
16S, it can control up to 144 points.
14 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
1. System Configuration
Memory capacity:
Program memory capacity of the T1 is 2 k steps. And that of the T1S is 8 k steps.
Whole the program and a part of data registers are stored in built-in EEPROM.
T1-16/28/40
T1-40S
T1-16S
RAM (for execution) and EEPROM (for back-up)
Memory
2 k steps
8 k steps
Program
(4 k mode or 8 k mode)
capacity
Auxiliary relay: 1024 points Auxiliary relay: 4096 points
Data capacity
Timer:
Counter:
64 points
64 points
Timer:
Counter:
256 points
256 points
Data register: 1024 words Data register: 4096 words
Program and leading 512
words of Data register
Program and the user specified range of
Data register (0 to 2048 words)
EEPROM
back-up
Capacitor: 6 hours or more Capacitor: 168 hours Capacitor: 1 hour
RAM back-up
(at 25°C)
or more
or more
(at 77°F)
Battery: 2 years
or more
Control functions:
In addition to the basic relay ladder functions, the T1/T1S provides functions such as
data operations, arithmetic operations, various functions, etc. Furthermore, its high-
speed counter functions, pulse output functions and data communication functions
allow its application to a wide scope of control systems.
T1-16/28/40
Ladder diagram with function block
Basic: 17 types Basic: 21 types Basic:
T1-40S
T1-16S
Language
21 types
Number of
instructions
Subroutines
Function: 76 types
Function: 99 types Function: 97 types
16
256
(nesting not allowed) (up to 3 levels of nesting)
Execution speed
Real-time
clock/calendar
Communication
1.4 µs/contact, 2.3 µs/coil, 4.2 µs/transfer, 6.5 µs/addition
No
Yes (year, month, day, week, hours,
minutes, seconds)
RS-232C
(programmer port)
RS-232C (programmer port),
RS-485 (multi-purpose)
Construction:
The T1-16S is a compact, easy-handling block style programmable controller. The
T1-16S has all of the features of a block style controller. In addition, the T1-16S has
modular expandability. The T1-16S provides flexibility into the block style controller.
Series compatibility:
Programming instructions are upward compatible in the T-Series programmable
controllers. The T1/T1S programs can be used for other models of the T-Series, T2,
T2E, T2N, T3 and T3H. Peripheral tools can also be shared.
Basic Hardware and Function 15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
1. System Configuration
1.2 Features
I/O module support:
The T1-16S has an interface for connecting the I/O modules. Up to eight modules
can be connected to the T1-16S.
By using the 16 points I/O module, the T1-16S can control up to 144 I/O points.
Built-in high-speed counter:
Two single-phase or one quadrature (2-phase) pulses can be counted. The
acceptable pulse rate is up to 5 kHz. (DC input type only)
Built-in analog setting adjusters:
Two analog setting adjusters are provided on the T1-16S. This allows operators to
adjust time or other control parameters easily using a screwdriver.
High speed processing:
Sophisticated machine control applications require high speed data manipulations.
The T1-16S is designed to meet these requirements.
• 1.4 µs per contact
• 4.2 µs per 16-bit transfer
• 2.3 µs per coil
• 6.5 µs per 16-bit addition
The T1-16S also supports interrupt input function (DC input type only). This allows
immediate operation independent of program scan.
High performance software:
The T1-16S offers 21 basic ladder instructions and 97 function instructions.
Subroutines, Interrupt functions, Indirect addressing, For/Next loops, Pre-derivative
real PID, etc. are standard on the T1-16S. These functions allow the T1-16S to be
applied to the most demanding control applications.
Battery-less operation:
The T1-16S has a standard built-in EEPROM, permitting operation without need of a
battery. Also, the variable data can be written into and/or read from the EEPROM,
providing completely maintenance-free back-up operation.
This function is an important feature for OEMs, because it can eliminate the need for
changing the battery every few years.
(Optional battery is also available to back-up real-time clock and retentive data)
16 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
1. System Configuration
Pulse output / PWM output:
One point of variable frequency pulses (max. 5 kHz) or variable duty pulses can be
output. These functions can be used to drive a stepping motor or to simulate an
analog output. (DC input type only)
Built-in computer link function:
The T1-16S’s RS-232C programmer port can accept the computer link protocol (data
read/write). This results in easy connection to a higher level computer, an operator
interface unit, etc.
The parity setting of the programmer port can be selected either odd or none. The
none parity mode is provided especially for telephone modem connection. Using
modems, remote programming/monitoring is available.
Real-time control data link network:
By connecting the TOSLINE-F10 remote module (FR112M) to the T1 -16S, high-
speed data link network can be established. In this network, upper T-series PLC
model (T2/T2E/T2N or T3/T3H) works as master and up to 16 T1-16Ss can be
connected as remote. Each T1-16S can exchange data with the master through 1
word input and 1 word output. The transmission speed can be selected either 750
kbps or 250 kbps.
Sampling trace function:
The sampling trace is the function to collect the user specified data every user
specified timing (minimum every scan), and to display the collected data on the
programmer screen in time chart and/or trend graph format. This function is useful
for checking the input signals changing.
Password protection:
By registering your passwords, four levels of protection is available according to the
security levels required for your application.
Level 4: Reading/writing program and writing data are prohibited
Level 3: Reading/writing program are prohibited
Level 2: Writing program is prohibited
Level 1: No protection (changing passwords is available only in this level)
Two points of solid-state output:
Each model of the T1-16S has two points of solid-state output (transistors for DC
input type and triacs for AC input type). These solid-state outputs are suitable for
frequent switching application.
Basic Hardware and Function 17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
1. System Configuration
DIN rail mounting:
The T1-16S is equipped with brackets for mounting on a standard 35 mm DIN rail.
The T1-16S can be mounted on a DIN rail as well as screw mounting.
On-line program changes:
When the T1-16S’s memory mode is set to 4 k steps mode, on-line (in RUN mode)
program changes are available. Furthermore, program writing into the built-in
EEPROM is also available in RUN mode. These functions are useful in program
debugging stage.
Real-time clock/calendar function: (Enhanced model only)
The T1-16S has the real-time-clock/calendar function (year, month, day, day of the
week, hours, minutes, seconds) that can be used for performing scheduled
operations, data gathering with time stamps, etc. To back-up the real-time
clock/calendar data, use of the optional battery is recommended.
RS-485 multi-purpose communication port: (Enhanced model only)
The T1-16S has an RS-485 multi-purpose communication port. Using this port, one
of the following communication modes can be selected.
• Computer link mode: T-series computer link protocol can be used in this mode.
Up to 32 T1-16Ss can be connected to a master computer. By using this mode,
MMI/SCADA system can be easily configured.
• Data link mode: Two PLCs (any combination of T1S, T2E or T2N) can be
directly linked together. This direct link is inexpensive, easily configured and
requires no special programming.
• Free ASCII mode: User defined ASCII messages can be transmitted and
received through this port. A terminal, printer, bar-code reader, or other serial
ASCII device can be directly connected.
• Inverter connection mode: This mode is specially provided to communicate with
Toshiba Inverters (ASDs) VF-A7/G7/S9 series. By using this function, the T1-16S
can control and monitor the connected Inverters.
18 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
1. System Configuration
1.3 System configuration
The following figure shows the T1-16S system configuration.
IBM-PC compatible
personal computer
MMI/SCADA
system
Inverter
Peripheral tool
IBM-PC compatible
personal computer
RS485 (Standard type only)
T1-16S basic unit
T1-16S
T-PDS
software
RS232C
Handy programmer
HP911A
I/O modules
Computer link function
MMI/SCADA
system
8 modules max.
Basic Hardware and Function 19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
1. System Configuration
1.4 I/O expansion
The T1-16S provides I/O expandability by connecting the I/O modules. Up to eight
I/O modules can be connected.
Available I/O modules
DI116M:
16 points DC input
DO116M:
DD116M:
RO108M:
AD121M:
AD131M:
DA121M:
DA131M:
TC111M:
FR112M:
16 points DC output
8 points DC input + 8 points DC output
8 points relay output
1 channel analog input (0 to 5V or 0 to 20mA)
1 channel analog input (-10 to +10V)
1 channel analog output (0 to 20mA)
1 channel analog output (-10 to +10V)
1 channel thermocouple input (type K, J, E, or ±50mV)
TOSLINE-F10 remote station
T1-16S maximum configuration
T1-16S
main unit
Up to 8 I/O modules
NOTE
(1) The 5Vdc power to the I/O modules is supplied from the main unit. The main
unit can supply maximum 1.5A of the 5Vdc power to the I/O modules. Check
the current consumption of each I/O module used. Refer to section 2.1.
(2) The connecting order of the I/O modules is not restricted except TOSLINE-
F10 remote station FR112M. When the FR112M is used, it must be the right
end module.
(3) If more than 8 I/O modules are connected, the T1-16S cannot operate
normally.
20 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
1. System Configuration
1.5 Components
1.5.1 Basic unit
The T1-16S is available in four types as shown in the following table.
Type
Link/ Calendar Power supply
Input
Output
T1-MDR16SS
(Enhanced model)
T1-MDR16SC
(Standard model)
T1-MDR16SSD
(Enhanced model)
T1-MDR16SCD
(Standard model)
100-240 Vac, 8 points - 24 Vdc 6 points - relay,
Yes
No
50/60 Hz
24 Vdc
2 points - transistor
Yes
No
Link terminals
(Enhanced model only)
Operation status LEDs
I/O status LEDs (Low side)
Mounting hole
Programmer
port cover
Battery holder
cover
Expantion
connector
I/O status LEDs (High side)
Power supply and
input/output terminals
Basic Hardware and Function 21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
1. System Configuration
♦ Behind the programmer port cover
Programmer port connector
Analog setting adjusters
(V0 and V1)
PRG
V0
V1
H/R
Mode control switch
(HALT / RUN)
Battery holder
Battery type: CR2032
(Optional)
A tab for battery eject
Power supply terminals:
Connect the power cable and grounding wire. The terminal screw size is M3.
See sections 4.4 and 4.5 for wiring.
Input terminals:
Connect input signal wires. The terminal screw size is M3. See section 2.4 for
details.
Output terminals:
Connect output signal wires. The terminal screw size is M3. See section 2.4 for
details.
22 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
1. System Configuration
I/O status LEDs:
Indicates the ON/OFF status of each I/O signal. (color: red)
SW54 setting
I/O intending for an indication
Note
value
0 (default)
1
Basic unit (L: X000-007, H: Y020-027)
I/O module slot 0
It indicates these at the
time of only RUN
mode.
2
3
I/O module slot 1
I/O module slot 2
4
I/O module slot 3
5
I/O module slot 4
6
I/O module slot 5
7
I/O module slot 6
8
I/O module slot 7
9
10
Others
TOSLINE-F10 (FR112M), Low 1 word
TOSLINE-F10 (FR112M), High 1 word
Basic unit (L: X000-007, H: Y020-027)
Operation status LEDs:
Indicates the operation status of the T1-16S.
FLT
RUN
PWR
PWR
Lit
Internal 5 Vdc power is normal.
(Power) (green)
Not lit
Internal 5 Vdc power is not normal.
RUN mode (in operation)
RUN
(green) Lit
Blinking HOLD mode
Not lit
Lit
HALT mode or ERROR mode
ERROR mode
FLT
(Fault)
(red)
Blinking Hardware error (programmer cannot be connected)
Not lit Normal
Mode control switch:
Controls the operation modes of the T1-16S.
H (HALT)
R (RUN)
When the switch is turned to H (HALT) side, the T1-16S stops
program execution (HALT mode). In this position, RUN/HALT
command from the programmer is disabled.
When the switch is turned to R (RUN) side, the T1-16S starts
program execution. This is the position during normal operation.
In this position, RUN/HALT command from the programmer is also
available.
Basic Hardware and Function 23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
1. System Configuration
Analog setting adjusters:
Two analog setting adjusters are provided. The V0 value is stored in SW30 and the
V1 value is stored in SW31. The converted value range is 0 to 1000. Refer to section
8.5 for details of the analog setting function.
Programmer port connector:
Used to connect the programmer cable. The interface is RS-232C. This port can also
be used for the computer link function. Refer to section 1.6 for more information
about the computer link function.
Expansion connector:
Used to connect the I/O module.
RS-485 port (Enhanced model only):
Used to connect a computer (SCADA system), operator interface unit, other T1-16S,
or many kinds of serial ASCII devices including Toshiba’s Inverter through RS-485
interface. Refer to section 1.7 for more information about the T1-16S’s RS-485 multi-
purpose communication functions.
Mounting holes:
Used to fix the T1-16S on a mounting frame by screws. The mounting holes are
provided at two opposite corners.
Use two M4 screws for mounting. See section 4.2 for
installing the unit.
T1
DIN rail bracket:
The DIN rail bracket is provided at the rear for mounting the T1-16S on a 35 mm DIN
rail. See section 4.2 for installing the unit.
24 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
1. System Configuration
1.5.2 I/O modules
The T1-16S can connect up to eight I/O modules.
The following 10 types of the I/O modules are available.
For specification details of the I/O modules, refer to the separate manual “T1-16S
User’s Manual − I/O Modules −“.
Type
DI116M
DO116M
DD116M
Description
16 points input, 24Vdc – 5mA
16 points output, 24Vdc – 100mA
8 points input, 24Vdc - 5mA
Power supply
Supplied from the
basic unit (5 Vdc)
+ 8 points output, 24Vdc – 100mA
8 points relay output, 24Vdc/240Vac - 1A
1 channel analog input, 0 to 5V / 0 to 20mA
1 channel analog input, ±10V
1 channel analog output, 0 to 20mA
1 channel analog output, ±10V
1 channel thermo-couple input
TOSLINE-F10 remote station,
1 word input + 1 word output
RO108M
AD121M
AD131M
DA121M
DA131M
TC111M
FR112M
FR112M
Other I/O modules
Expantion connector
Expantion connectors
NOTE
(1) If more than 8 I/O modules are connected, T1-16S cannot operate normally.
(2) The TOSLINE-F10 remote station module (FR112M) must be connected at the
right end. Tow or more FR112Ms cannot be used together.
Basic Hardware and Function 25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
1. System Configuration
1.5.3 Options
The following optional items are available.
Item
Cable for
programming tool
Programmer port
connector
Type
Description
For T-PDS, 5 m length
CJ105
PT16S
For RS-232C computer link, with 2 m cable
Option card I/O
connector
PT15S
PT15F
Cable side connector for
DI116M, DO116M, or DD116M
Soldering type
Flat cable type
Back-up battery
CR2032 For memory back up. (Available on the market.)
26 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
1. System Configuration
1.6 Programmer port function
The interface of the T1-16S’s programmer port is RS-232C. Normally this port is
used to connect the programmer. However, this port can also be used for the
computer link function.
The computer link is a data communication function between computer or operator
interface unit and the T1-16S. The data in the T1-16S can be read and written by
creating simple communication program on the computer. The computer link protocol
of the T1-16S is published in “T1-16S User’s Manual − Communication Function −”.
Item
Specifications
Conforms to RS-232C
Interface
Transmission system
Synchronization
Transmission speed
Transmission distance
Framing
Half-duplex
Start-stop system (asynchronous)
9600 bps (fixed)
15 m max.
Start bit:
Data bits:
Parity:
1 bit
8 bits (fixed)
Odd or none
1 bit (fixed)
Stop bit:
Protocol
T-series computer link (ASCII)
Programmer (binary)
Transmission delay option 0 to 300 ms
By using the multi-drop adapter (CU111), multiple T1-16Ss can be connected on an
RS-485 line. The T-series PLC programming software (T-PDS) can also be used in
this configuration.
Master Computer
Operator Interface
RS-232C
RS-485 (1 km max.)
Max. 32 T1-16Ss
C
U
C
U
C
U
T1-16S
T1-16S
T1-16S
T1-16S
Basic Hardware and Function 27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
1. System Configuration
1.7 RS-485 port communication function
The T1-16S enhanced model has an RS-485 multi-purpose communication port.
This port can work independent of the programmer port.
By using this communication port, one of the following four communication modes is
available, computer link mode, data link mode, free ASCII mode, and Inverter
connection mode.
For details of these functions, refer to the separate manual “T1-16S User’s Manual −
Communication Function −”.
Item
Computer
link
Free ASCII
Inverter
connection
Data link
Interface
Conforms to RS-458
Transmission system Half-duplex
Synchronization
Transmission code
Transmission speed
Start-stop system (asynchronous)
ASCII/binary ASCII
Binary
Binary
19200 bps
(fixed)
300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, or
19200 bps
1 km max.
Transmission
distance
Framing
Start bit:
Data bits: 7 or 8 bits
Parity:
Stop bit:
T-series
computer
link (ASCII), ASCII
Programmer messages
(binary)
1 bit
Special
Special
Odd, even, or none
1 or 2 bits
User
Protocol
Inverter VF-
A7/G7/S9
binary
defined
protocol
Link configuration
1-to-N
N/A
1-to-N
1-to-1
NOTE
T1-16S standard model does not have the RS-485 interface.
28 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
1. System Configuration
Computer link mode
T-series computer link protocol can be used in this mode. A maximum of 32 T1-16Ss
can be connected to a master computer.
By using this mode, all the T1-16S’s data can be accessed by a master computer.
The T-series PLC programming software (T-PDS) can also be used in this
configuration.
Master Computer
RS-485 (1 km max.)
Max. 32 T1-16Ss
T1-16S
T1-16S
T1-16S
T1-16S
Data link mode
Two PLCs (any combination of T1-16S, T2E or T2N) can be directly linked together.
This direct link is inexpensive, easily configured and requires no special
programming. Data registers D0000 to D0031 are used for the data transfer.
T1S
T1-16S
T1
RS-485 (1 km max.)
Station No. 2
D0000
Station No. 1
D0000
D0015
D0016
D0015
D0016
D0031
D0031
Basic Hardware and Function 29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
1. System Configuration
Free ASCII mode
The free ASCII mode is used to connect between the T1-16S and various serial
ASCII devices, such as a micro computer, bar code reader, printer, display, etc.
By using this mode, the T1-16S can work as a communication master. Therefore, the
T1-16S can communicate with other PLCs using the computer link protocol.
T1-16S
RS-485 (1 km max.)
• Bar-code reader
• ID system
• Weigh scale
• Power meter
• Printer
• Others
30 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
1. System Configuration
Free ASCII mode
The T1-16S's Inverter connection mode is a special function to monitor/control the
Toshiba Inverters (ASDs) VF-A7/G7/S9 through the RS-485 line.
Using this mode, the T1-16S can perform the following functions for the Inverters
connected on the RS-485 line without any special communication program.
• Monitoring − Operating frequency and Terminal status
• Control − Run/Stop/Jog, Forward/Reverse, Frequency reference, etc.
• Parameter read/write
• Broadcast command
T1-16S
RS-485 (1 km max.)
RS485 adapter
888
888
888
888
888
888
VF-A7
VF-A7
VF-S9
VF-S9
VF-S9
VF-S9
(Max. 64 Inverters)
Basic Hardware and Function 31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
1. System Configuration
1.8 Real-time data link system
TOSLINE-F10
TOSLINE-F10 is a high speed data transmission system suited for small points I/O
distribution system. By inserting the TOSLINE-F10 remotemodule (FR112M), the
T1-16S can work as a remote station of the TOSLINE-F10 network. On this network,
the T1-16S sends 1 word data to the master station and receives 1 word data from
the master station.
Item
TOSLINE-F10 system specifications
High speed mode Long distance mode
Bus (terminated at both ends)
Topology
Transmission distance
(without repeater)
Transmission speed
Scan transmission
capacity
500 m max. (total)
1 km max. (total)
750 kbps
512 points (32 words) max.
250 kbps
Scan cycle
Error checking
7 ms/32 words
CRC check
12 ms/32 words
NOTE
(1) Refer to the separate “T1 User’s Manual − Option Card and I/O
Module −“ for details of the TOSLINE-F10 remote card (FR112).
(2) Refer to the separate TOSLINE-F10 User’s Manual for details of
overall TOSLINE-F10 system.
Typical data link configuration
The figure below shows the typical data link configuration.
Master
computer
T2E
(master)
TOSLINE-F10
T2E
(remote)
T1-16S
T1-16S
T1-16S
RI/O
RI/O
RI/O: remote I/O
Operator interface units
32 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
1. System Configuration
1.9 Peripheral tools
The following peripheral tools are available for the T1-16S.
T-Series Program Development System (T-PDS)
The T-Series Program Development System (T-PDS) is a software which runs on
any IBM-PC compatible personal computers such as Toshiba’s Notebook computers.
The same T-PDS software supports on-line/off-line programming, debugging and
program documentation for all the T-Series programmable controllers T1/T1S,
T2/T2E/T2N, T3/T3H and S2T.
• User-friendly program editor includes cut & paste, address search & replace,
program block move/copy, etc.
• Group programming − part program development by multiple designers and
merging them into a complete program − enhance the software productivity.
• Powerful monitoring, I/O force and data set functions fully support your program
debugging.
• Documentation of programs with commentary makes your maintenance work
easy.
• Remote monitoring/programming via modem (radio/phone) is possible.
The table below shows the T-PDS versions that support the T1-16S.
Type
Part number
Versions available for
T1-16/28/40 T1-40S/T1-16S
*1)
T-PDS for Windows TMW33E1SS
T-PDS for MS-DOS TMM33I1SS
Ver 1.0 or later
Ver 1.61 or later
Ver 1.2 or later
Ver 2.1 or later
*1)
*1) The T1-16S can be used with these versions. However, in this case, there are
the following functional limitations.
• The program size setting is only available as 2 k. It is set to 4 k mode in the
T1-16S.
• Some of the added instructions (MAVE, DFL, HTOA, ATOH) may not be
edited/monitored. (depending on the version)
NOTE
The connection cable for the T1-16S is different from that for upper T-Series
PLCs. These cables are supplied separately.
Connection cable for T1-16S ... Type: CJ105, 5 m length
Connection cable for T2/T3 … . Type: CJ905, 5 m length
Basic Hardware and Function 33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
1. System Configuration
T-Series Handy Programmer (HP911A)
The HP911A is a hand-held programmer, that can be used to program the T1-16S
using ladder diagram. Its portability makes it ideal for maintenance use at remote
locations.
The HP911A has the following features.
• The HP911A supports ladder diagram programming of T-Series programmable
controllers T1-16S, T2/T2E/T2N and T3.
• Built-in EEPROM allows program copy between T-Series controllers.
• Two display modes are available,
- Normal: 5 lines and 12 columns
- Zoom: Full device description
• On-line data set and I/O force are useful for system checking.
• Backlit LCD display allows operation in dim light.
There are two types of the Handy Programmer (HP911) depending on the cable
included with.
Type
HP911A
HP911
Part number
THP911A∗S
THP911∗∗S
Cable included with Versions available for T1-16S
2 m cable for T1-16S Ver 1.1 or later
2 m cable for the upper Ver 1.1 or later
T-series PLCs
The T1-16S can be used with the HP911(A). However, there are the following
functional limitations.
• The program size setting is only available as 2 k. It is set to 4 k mode in the T1-
16S.
• Some of the added instructions (MAVE, DFL, HTOA, ATOH) cannot be
edited/monitored.
NOTE
A 2 m connection cable for the T1-16S (Type: CJ102) is supplied with the
HP911A. The cable for the T2/T3 is available separately. (Type: CJ902, 2 m
length)
34 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
1. System Configuration
Program Storage Module (RM102)
The program storage module (RM102) is an
external memory for storing the T1-16S
program. By using the RM102, program saving
from the T1-16S to the RM102, and program
loading from the RM102 to the T1-16S can be
done without need of a programmer.
Because the RM102 has an EEPROM,
maintenance-free program storage and quick
saving/loading are available.
Multi-drop adapter (CU111)
The T1-16S’s RS-232C programmer port
supports the computer link function.
When two or more T1-16Ss are connected with
a master computer, the multi-drop adapter
(CU111) can be used. (One-to-N configuration)
The CU111 is an RS-232C/RS-485 converter
specially designed for the T1-16S’s
programmer port.
Basic Hardware and Function 35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
36 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
Section 2
Specifications
2.1 General specifications, 38
2.2 Functional specifications, 40
2.3 I/O specifications, 42
2.4 External dimensions, 46
Basic Hardware and Function 37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
2. Specifications
2.1 General specifications
Item
T1-16S
100 to 240Vac (+10/-15%), 50/60 Hz
45VA or less
Power supply voltage
Power consumption
Inrush current
50A or less (at 240Vac, cold start)
0.2A (for external devices and/or for input signals)
Output 24Vdc
rating
(24Vdc, ±10%)
5Vdc
(Note)
1.5A (for I/O module)
24Vdc (+20/-15%)
Power supply voltage
Power consumption
Inrush current
18W or less
25A or less (at 24Vdc)
1.5A (for I/O module)
5Vdc output rating (Note)
Retentive power interruption
Insulation resistance
10ms or less
10MΩ or more
(between power terminals and ground terminal)
Withstand voltage
Ambient temperature
Ambient humidity
Noise immunity
1500Vac - 1 minute
0 to 55°C (operation), -20 to 75°C (storage)
5 to 95%RH, no condensation
1000Vp-p/1µs, Conform to EMC Directive 89/336/EEC
9.8m/s2 (1g)
Vibration immunity
(for 30 minutes per axis, on 3 mutually perpendicular axes)
Shock immunity
98m/s2 (10g)
(3 shocks per axis, on 3 mutually perpendicular axes)
500g
Approximate weight
NOTE
(1) 24Vdc service power output is not provided on the DC power supply type.
(2) The maximum output current of the 5Vdc is 1.5A. However there is the following
restrictions, depending on the conditions.
(A)
• When HP911 is used:
1.5
→ Redused by 0.2A
• When RS-485 port is used:
1.0
→ Reduced by 0.1A
• When 24Vdc service power is used:
→ Refer to the right chart.
0.1
0.2 (A)
24Vdc service power
38 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
2. Specifications
NOTE
(3) The 5Vdc current consumption of each I/O modules is described below.
Check that the total 5Vdc current consumption is within the limit.
Model
Specifications
5Vdc consumer
current
DI116M
16points, 24Vdc-5mA input.
50mA
DO116M 16points, 24Vdc-100mA output.
DD116M 8points, 24Vdc-5mA input.
8points, 24Vdc-100mA output.
RO108M 8 points, 24Vdc/240Vac – 1A relay output
AD121M 1ch. 12bit analog input.
(0 to 20mA, 0 to 5V)
AD131M 1ch. 12bit analog input. (±10V)
DA121M 1ch. 12bit analog output.
(0 to 20mA, 0 to 5V)
50mA
50mA
260mA
260mA
260mA
350mA
DA131M 1ch. 12bit analog output. (±10V)
TC111M 1ch. 12bit thermo couple input.
FR112M TOSLINE-F10 remote station.
240mA
400mA
100mA
Basic Hardware and Function 39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
2. Specifications
2.2 Functional specifications
Item
Control method
Scan system
I/O update
T1-16S
Stored program, cyclic scan system
Floating scan or constant scan (10 – 200ms, 10ms units)
Batch I/O refresh
(direct I/O instruction available at basic unit’s I/O)
RAM and EEPROM (no back-up battery required)
8K steps
Program memory (Note)
Program capacity
(4K or 8K mode)
Programming language
Instructions
Ladder diagram with function block
Basic: 21
Function: 97
Execution speed
Program types
1.4µs/contact, 2.3µs/coil,
4.2µs/16-bit transfer, 6.5µs/16-bit addition
1 main program
1 sub-program (initial program)
1 timer interrupt (interval: 5 to 1000ms, 5ms units)
4 I/O interrupt (high-speed counter and interrupt input)
256 subroutines (up to 3 levels of nesting)
512 points/ 32 words (X/XW, Y/YW)
User data I/O register
Auxiliary relay 4096 points/ 256 words (R/RW)
Special relay
Timer
1024 points/ 64 words (S/SW)
256 points (T./T)
64 at 0.01s, 192 at 0.1s
256 points (C./C)
Counter
Data register
Index register
4096 words (D)
3 words (I, J, K)
Memory Capacitor
back-up
1 hour (at 25°C)
Battery (option) Max. 2 years.
Min. 6 months. (Note)
NOTE
(1) The user program stored in the EEPROM is transferred to the RAM
when power is turned on. Therefore, if the program is modified, it is
necessary to issue the EEPROM Write command from the programming
tool. Otherwise, the modified program is over-written by original
EEPROM contents at the next initial load timing.
(2) The data of RAM and calendar IC are backed up by built-in capacitor
and optional battery.
(3) When the optional battery is used, replace the battery periodically with
referring to the table below.
Annual average air temperature
Under 30°C (86°F)
2 years
Over 30°C (86°F)
1 year
Operation
time per day
Over 8 hours
Under 8 hours
1 year
6 months
40 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
2. Specifications
Functional specifications (cont’d)
Item
T1-16S
I/O capacity
16 points (basic)
+128 points (I/O modules)
I/O type
Input
Output
24Vdc input (8 points)
Relay (6 points) + transistor (2 points)
Fixed
Yes, ±60 s/month at 25°C
(Enhanced model only)
I/O terminal block
Real-time clock
/calendar
Special I/O functions
(Note)
• High speed counter, 2 single or 1 quadrature
• Interrupt input, 2 points
• Adjustable analog register, 2 points
• Pulse output, CW+CCW or pulse+direction
• PWM output
Communications
interface
• 1 port RS-232C (programmer port)
- for Programmer or Computer link connection
• 1 port RS-485 (Enhanced model only)
- Programmer
- Computer link
- Data link
- Free ASCII
• TOSLINE-F10 remote (by I/O module)
• Sampling trace, 8 devices and 3 register - 256 times
• On-line programming
Debug support
function
• On-line EEPROM write
NOTE
(1) High-speed counter, interrupt input, pulse output and PWM output are
available in the DC input types.
(2) High-speed counter and interrupt input cannot be used simultaneously.
(3) Pulse output and PWM output cannot be used simultaneously.
Basic Hardware and Function 41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
2. Specifications
2.3 I/O specifications
• Input specifications
Item
Input type
Number of input points 8 points (8 points/common)
Specifications
DC input, current source/sink
Rated input voltage
Rated input current
Min. ON voltage
Max. OFF voltage
ON delay time
24Vdc, +10/-15 %
7mA (at 24Vdc)
15Vdc
5Vdc
0 to 15ms *1
OFF delay time
0 to 15ms *1
Input signal display
LED display for all points, lit at ON, internal logic
side
External connection
Withstand voltage
Removable terminal block, M3
1500Vac, 1 minute
(between internal and external circuits)
Internal circuit
LED
0
7
C
*1: User can change the input ON/OFF delay time of the DC input.
The setting range is 0 to 15ms. (Default value = 10ms) Refer to section 8.2.
42 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
2. Specifications
• Input signal connections
T1-16S
DC IN
L
Vin
21 23 25 27
C
1 3 5 7
−
N NC
+ 0 2 4 6 C 20 22 24 26 C
Service power
24Vdc
24Vdc
24Vdc input
NOTE
The 24Vdc service power output is not provided on the DC power supply type.
Basic Hardware and Function 43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
2. Specifications
• Output specifications
Item
Specifications
Relay output
Relay contact, normally open
Number of output points 6 points
(6 pts/common)
Transistor output
Transistor output, current sink
Output type
2 points
(2 points/common)
24Vdc
20.0 - 28.0Vdc
Rated load voltage
240Vac/24Vdc (max.)
Max. 264Vac/125Vdc
Range of load voltage
Maximum load current 2A/point (resistive),
4A/common
0.5A/point (resistive)
ON resistance
50mΩ or less
(initial value)
−
Voltage drop at ON
Leakage current at OFF None
Minimum load
0.5V or less
0.1mA or less
−
−
5Vdc, 10mA
(50mW)
ON delay time
10ms or less
10ms or less
0.1ms or less
0.1ms or less
OFF delay time
Input signal display
External connection
Withstand voltage
Internal circuit
LED display for all points, lit at ON, internal logic side
Removable terminal block, M3
1500Vac, 1 minute (between internal and external circuits)
LED
LED
Vin
20
21
C
22
27
C
Ry
*1: The switching life of the relay output is as follows.
20 million times or more (mechanical)
100 thousand times or more (electrical, at maximum rated voltage and current)
44 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
2. Specifications
• Output signal connections
T1-16S
L
DC OUT
RELAY OUT
Vin
C
1 3 5 7
21 23 25 27
−
N NC
+ 0 2 4 6 C 20 22 24 26 C
Service power
24Vdc
PS
240Vac/24Vdc (max.)
24Vdc +
PS
Transister output
Relay output
Basic Hardware and Function 45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
2. Specifications
2.4 External dimensions
♦ T1-16S
[mm]
♦ I/O module
[mm]
46 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
Section 3
I/O Application Precautions
3.1 Application precautions for input signals, 48
3.2 Application precautions for output signals, 50
Basic Hardware and Function 47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
3. I/O Application Precautions
3.1 Application precautions for input signals
Configure emergency stop and safety interlocking circuits outside the
T1-16S. Otherwise, malfunction of the T1-16S can cause injury or serious
accidents.
!
WARNING
(1) Minimum ON/OFF time of the input signal
The following conditions guarantee correct reading of the ON/OFF state of the input
signal:
Input ON time: ON delay time + the time for one scan
Input OFF time: OFF delay time + the time for one scan
The ON and OFF times of the input signals must be longer than these intervals.
(2) Increasing the contact current
The reliability of some contacts cannot be guaranteed by the specified input current. In
this case, install an external bleeder resistor to increase the contact current.
Bleeder resistor
V
R =
I
I1
T1
input
circuit
−
I
I
1
R
V
V 2
R
I2
Wattage >
×3
(3) Connecting transistor output device
An example of connecting a transistor output device to T1-16S’s input circuit is shown
below.
• For NPN open collector
• For PNP open collector
C
T1
T1
input
circuit
input
circuit
C
48 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
3. I/O Application Precautions
(4) Countermeasures against leakage current
When a switch with an LED or sensor is used, the input sometimes cannot recognize
that the switch is off due to the current leakage. In this case, install a bleeder resistor
to reduce input impedance.
LE
Bleeder resistor
T1
input
circuit
C
Select a bleeder resistor according to the following criteria:
(a) The voltage between the input terminals must be lower than the OFF voltage
when the sensor is switched off.
(b) The current must be within the allowable range when the sensor is switched on.
(c) Calculate the wattage of the bleeder resistor by multiplying the current when the
sensor is switched on times three.
Basic Hardware and Function 49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
3. I/O Application Precautions
3.2 Application precautions for output signals
Configure emergency stop and safety interlocking circuits outside the
T1-16S. Otherwise, malfunction of the T1-16S can cause injury or serious
accidents
!
!
WARNING
CAUTION
1. Turn on power to the T1-16S before turning on power to the loads.
Failure to do so may cause unexpected behavior of the loads.
2. Configure the external circuit so that the external 24Vdc power required
for the transistor output circuits and power to the loads are switched
on/off simultaneously. Also, turn off power to the loads before turning off
power to the T1-16S.
3. Install fuses appropriate to the load current in the external circuits for the
outputs. Failure to do so can cause fire in case of load over-current.
(1) 2 points of solid-state output
The leading 2 points of output (Y020 and Y021) are solid-state outputs, transistors on
the DC input types.
These solid-state outputs are suited for frequent switching applications.
Note that the specifications of the solid-state outputs and other outputs (relays) are
different.
(2) Switching life of output relays
Expected relay life is more than 100,000 electrical cycles at rated maximum voltage
and current, and more than 20 million mechanical cycles. The expected contact life
(electrical cycles) is shown on the table below.
Load
voltage
Load Expected life
current (thousand)
Load
voltage
Load Expected life
current (thousand)
AC 110Vac,
2A
1A
0.5A
2A
340
720
1,600
150
DC 24Vdc,
load L/R = 0 ms
2A
1A
0.5A
2A
280
600
1,300
60
load
COSφ = 1
110Vac,
24Vdc,
1A
0.5A
2A
1A
0.5A
2A
320
700
220
500
1,100
100
210
L/R = 15 ms
1A
0.5A
1A
0.5A
0.5A
0.2A
0.5A
0.2A
0.2A
0.1A
150
350
200
420
130
420
200
550
150
350
COSφ = 0.7
220Vac,
COSφ = 1
48Vdc,
L/R = 0 ms
48Vdc,
L/R = 15 ms
110Vdc,
L/R = 0 ms
110Vdc,
220Vac,
COSφ = 0.7
1A
0.5A
460
L/R = 15 ms
50 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
3. I/O Application Precautions
(3) Over-current protection
The output circuit of the T1-16S does not contain protective fuses. Fuses rated for the
output should be provided by the user.
Load
T1
output
Load
PS
Fuse appropriate to
the common current
(4) Output surge protection
Where an inductive load is connected to the output, a relatively high energy transient
voltage will be generated when the relay turns OFF. To prevent the problems caused
by this surge, install a surge absorber in parallel to the inductive load.
Load
Surge absorber
T1
output
circuit
PS
Surge absorber:
• Flywheel diode (for DC output)
Inverse withstand voltage: At least three times that of the power supply
Forward current: Larger than the load current
• Varistor (for AC output)
The voltage rating is 1.2 times the maximum (peak) voltage of the power supply
• CR snubber (for DC or AC output)
R: 0.5 to 1Ω per volt coil voltage
C: 0.5 to 1µF per ampere of coil current (non-polarity capacitor)
Basic Hardware and Function 51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
52 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
Section 4
Installation and Wiring
4.1 Environmental conditions, 54
4.2 Installing the unit, 55
4.3 Wiring terminals, 57
4.4 Grounding, 58
4.5 Power supply wiring, 59
4.6 I/O wiring, 61
Basic Hardware and Function 53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
4. Installation and Wiring
4.1 Environmental conditions
Excess temperature, humidity, vibration, shocks, or dusty and corrosive
!
CAUTION
gas environment can cause electrical shock, fire or malfunction.
Install and use the T1-16S and related equipment in the environment
described in this section.
Do not install the T1-16S in the following locations:
• Where the ambient temperature drops below 0°C or exceeds 55°C.
• Where the relative humidity drops below 20% or exceeds 90%.
• Where there is condensation due to sudden temperature changes.
• In locations subject to vibration that exceeds tolerance.
• In locations subject to shock that exceeds tolerance.
• Where there are corrosive or flammable gases.
• In locations subject to dust, machining debris or other particles.
• In locations exposed to direct sunlight.
Observe the following precautions when installing enclosures in which the T1-16S will
be installed:
• Provide the maximum possible distance from high-voltage or high-power panels.
This distance must be at least 200mm.
• If installing the enclosures in the vicinity of high-frequency equipment, be sure to
correctly ground the enclosures.
• When sharing the channel base with other panels, check for leakage current from
the other panels or equipment.
54 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
4. Installation and Wiring
4.2 Installing the unit
1. Improper installation directions or insufficient installation can cause
fire or the units to drop. Install the T1-16S and related equipment in
accordance with the instructions described in this section.
!
CAUTION
2. Turn off power before installing or removing any units, modules,
racks or terminal blocks. Failure to do so can cause electrical shock
or damage to the T1-16S and related equipment.
3. Entering wire scraps or other foreign debris into to the T1-16S and
related equipment can cause fire or malfunction. Pay attention to
prevent entering them into the T1 and related equipment during
installation and wiring.
NOTE
The T1-16S basic unit and the I/O module come equipped with a bracket at the rear
for mounting on a 35mm DIN rail.
Installation precautions:
• Because the T1-16S is not dust-proof, install it in a dust-proof enclosure.
• Do not install the unit directly above equipment that generates a large amount of
heat, such as a heater, transformer, or large-capacity resistor.
• Do not install the unit within 200mm of high-voltage or high-power cables.
• Allow at least 70mm on all sides of the unit for ventilation.
• For safely during maintenance and operation, install the unit as far as possible from
high-voltage or power equipment. Alternatively, keep the unit separate using a
metal plate or similar separator.
• If high-frequency equipment is installed in the enclosure together with the T1-16S,
special attention is required for grounding. See section 4.4.
• Be sure to install the unit vertically with keeping the power terminals downside. Do
not install the unit horizontally or upside-down for safety reason.
• Use M4 size screws to mount the T1-16S.
(Recommended torque: 1.47N⋅m = 15Kgf⋅cm)
Upward
Mount the T1-16S on a vertical panel.
All other mounting positions are not
acceptable.
Basic Hardware and Function 55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
4. Installation and Wiring
Dimensions for screw mounting:
56 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
4. Installation and Wiring
4.3 Wiring terminals
1. Turn off power before wiring to minimize the risk of electrical shock.
!
CAUTION
2. Exposed conductive parts of wire can cause electrical shock. Use
crimp-style terminals with insulating sheath or insulating tape to cover
the conductive parts. Also close the terminal covers securely on the
terminal blocks when wiring has been completed.
3. Turn off power before removing or replacing units, modules, terminal
blocks or wires. Failure to do so can cause electrical shock or damage
to the T1-16S and related equipment.
The terminal screw size of the T1-16S is M3. Use crimp-style terminals of 7mm width
or less useable for M3. The terminal block is not removable (fixed).
NOTE
For input and output signal connections, refer to sections 2.4 and 3.
T1-MDR16SS .... AC power supply model
T1-MDR16SSD..DC power supply model
RS-485 (Enhanced model only)
RS-485 (Enhanced model only)
TXA RXA RXB
TXB TRM SG
TXA RXA RXB
TXB TRM SG
MDR16SS
MDR16SSD
DC IN
DC OUT
RELAY OUT
DC IN
DCOUT
RELAY OUT
+
Vin
Vin
21 23 25 27
L
C
1
3
5
7
21 23 25 27
C
1
3
5
7
NC
−
-
N
NC +
0
2
4
6
C 20 22 24 26
C
NC NC 0
2
4
6
C 20 22 24 26
C
NOTE
(1) NC stands for ”no connect”. Do not use the NC terminals for wire
relaying or branching.
(2) For the connections of the RS-485 communication port (the upper
terminal block), refer to the separate manual “T1-16S User’s Manual -
Communication Function -.
The applicable wire size is 0.3mm2 (22 AWG) to 1.25mm2 (16 AWG). The table below
shows the recommended wire size.
Type of signal
Power
Grounding
I/O signals
Recommended wire size
1.25mm2 (16 AWG)
1.25mm2 (16 AWG)
0.3mm2 (22 AWG) to 0.75mm2 (18 AWG)
Basic Hardware and Function 57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
4. Installation and Wiring
4.4 Grounding
1. Turn off power before wiring to minimize the risk of electrical shock.
!
CAUTION
2. Operation without grounding may cause electrical shock or malfunction.
Connect the ground terminal on the T1-16S to the system ground.
The optimum method for grounding electronic equipment is to ground it separately
from other high-power systems, and to ground more than one units of electronic
equipment with a single-point ground.
Although the T1-16S has noise immunity to be used in industrial operating conditions,
grounding is important for safety and reliability.
Check the grounding against the following criteria.
1. The T1-16S must not become a path for a ground current. A high-frequency current
is particularly harmful.
2. Equalize the ground potentials when the expansion rack or unit is connected.
Ground the T1-16S and the expansion rack or unit at a single point.
3. Do not connect the ground of the T1-16S to that of high-power systems.
4. Do not use a ground that has unstable impedance, such as painted screws, or
ground subject to vibration.
The grounding marked terminal (see below) is provided on the T1-16S basic unit for
grounding purpose.
In case of the expansion rack is connected to the T1-16S, the rack mounting screw is
used for this purpose.
T1-16S
Mounting panel
System ground
• 1.25mm2 (16 AWG) wire should be used to connect the T1-16S and the expansion
rack/unit with the enclosure grounding bus bar.
• 100Ω or less to ground is required.
58 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
4. Installation and Wiring
4.5 Power supply wiring
1. Turn off power before wiring to minimize the risk of electrical shock.
!
CAUTION
2. Applying excess power voltage to the T1-16S can cause explosion or
fire. Apply power of the specified ratings described below.
Wire the power source to the T1-16S power supply terminals.
T1-16S
Insulation
Line filter
transformer
Power source
• Power conditions:
AC power supply type
100 to 240Vac, +10/-15%
50/60Hz, ±5%
DC power supply type
24Vdc, +20/-15%
-
Rated voltage
Frequency
Power consumption 45VA or less
18W or less
Retentive power
interruption
Continuous operation for less than 10ms
• 1.25mm2 (16 AWG) twisted-pair cable should be used for the power cable.
• The power cable should be separated from other cables.
Basic Hardware and Function 59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
4. Installation and Wiring
Connections of the power supply terminals are shown below.
• AC power supply type
100-240Vac
∼
L
N
100 to 240Vac
Grounding
• DC power supply type
24 Vdc
+
-
+
24Vdc
-
Grounding
60 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
4. Installation and Wiring
4.6 I/O wiring
1. Turn off power before wiring to minimize the risk of electrical shock.
!
CAUTION
2. Exposed conductive parts of wire can cause electrical shock. Use
crimp-style terminals with insulating sheath or insulating tape to cover
the conductive parts. Also close the terminal covers securely on the
terminal blocks when wiring has been completed.
3. Turn off power before removing or replacing units, modules, terminal
blocks or wires. Failure to do so can cause electrical shock or damage
to the T1-16S and related equipment.
• Refer to sections 2.4 and 3 for instructions on how to properly wire the I/O
terminals.
• 0.75mm2 (18 AWG) to 0.3mm2 (22 AWG) wires are recommended for I/O signals.
• Separate the I/O signal cables from high-power cables by at least 200mm.
• If expansion rack or unit is used, separate the expansion cable from the power and
I/O signal cables by or unit at least 50mm.
• It is recommended to separate the input signal cables from output signal cables.
T1-16S
200mm
or more
Output
signal
High-power
cable
Input
signal
Basic Hardware and Function 61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
62 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
Section 5
Operating System Overview
5.1 Operation modes, 64
5.2 About the built-in EEPROM, 66
5.3 Scanning, 69
Basic Hardware and Function 63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
5. Operating System Overview
5.1 Operation modes
The T1-16S has three basic operation modes, the RUN mode, the HALT mode and
the ERROR mode. The T1-16S also has the HOLD and RUN-F modes mainly for
system checking.
RUN:
The RUN mode is a normal control-operation mode.
In this mode, the T1-16S reads external signals, executes the user program
stored in the RAM, and outputs signals to the external devices according to
the user program. It is in the RUN mode that the T1-16S performs scans the
user program logic, which is the basic operation of a PLC.
Program changes and EEPROM write are possible while the T1-16S is in
the RUN mode. Refer to section 6.9.
HALT:
The HALT mode is a programming mode.
In this mode, user program execution is stopped and all outputs are
switched off.
Program loading into the T1-16S is possible only in the HALT mode.
For the standard T1, program changes and EEPROM write are possible only
when the T1 is in the HALT mode.
ERROR: The ERROR mode is a shutdown mode as a result of self-diagnosis.
The T1-16S enters the ERROR mode if internal trouble is detected by self-
diagnosis. In this mode, program execution is stopped and all outputs are
switched off. The cause of the shutdown can be confirmed by connecting
the programming tool.
To exit from the ERROR mode, execute the Error Reset command from the
programming tool, or cycle power off and then on again.
HOLD: The HOLD mode is provided mainly for checking the external I/O signals.
In this mode, user program execution is stopped, with input and output
updating is executed. It is therefore possible to suspend program execution
while holding the output state. Moreover, a desired output state can be
established by setting any data by using the programming tool.
RUN-F: The RUN-F mode is a forced RUN mode provided for program checking.
This mode is effective when using the expansion I/Os.
Deferent from the normal RUN mode, the RUN-F mode allows operation
even if the registered I/O modules are not actually mounted.
64 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
5. Operating System Overview
The operation modes are switched by the mode control switch provided on the T1-16S
and the mode control commands issued from the programming tool.
The mode transition conditions are shown below.
(Power ON)
RUN
HALT
HOLD
RUN-F
ERROR
Mode control switch is in R (RUN) side.
Mode control switch is in H (HALT) side.
Mode control switch is turned to H (HALT) side, or HALT command is issued from
the programming tool.
Mode control switch is turned to R (RUN) side, or RUN command is issued from
the programming tool.
Force RUN (RUN-F) command is issued from the programming tool.
HOLD command is issued from the programming tool.
HOLD Cancel command is issued from the programming tool.
Error Reset command is issued from the programming tool.
(dotted line) Error is detected by self-diagnosis.
NOTE
The commands from the programming tool are available when the mode
control switch is in R (RUN) side.
Basic Hardware and Function 65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
5. Operating System Overview
5.2 About the built-in EEPROM
The T1-16S is equipped with a built-in EEPROM and a RAM as standard features.
The user program is stored in the EEPROM so that the user program can be
maintained without the need of a battery. A part of the Data register can also be
stored in the EEPROM.
The table below shows the contents stored in the built-in EEPROM.
T1-16S
User program
User data
Entire program (8 k steps) and System information
User specified number of Data register starting with address 0.
It is set by SW55.
D0000 - Dnnnn
(up to 2048 words)
Setting
SW36 - SW38:
information
Programmer port settings
SW55:
Number of Data register to be saved in the EEPROM
SW56 - SW57:
RS-485 port settings
Sampling trace setting information
The user program and the data stored in the EEPROM are transferred to the RAM
when power is turned on. Subsequent program execution is done based on the RAM
contents. Program editing is also performed on the RAM contents.
Therefore, if the program is modified, it is necessary to issue the EEPROM Write
command from the programming tool. Otherwise, the modified program is over-
written by original EEPROM contents when the power is turned off and on again.
66 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
5. Operating System Overview
EEPROM
RAM
User program
(8 k steps)
User program
(8 k steps)
and System info
and System info
Data register
(D0000 to Dnnnn,
user setting)
Data register
(0 to 2048 words,
user setting)
Other data
Other data
The rest of Data
register and
other registers
Executed when power is turned on (it is called initial load) or EEPROM Read
command is issued from the programming tool. The EEPROM Read is possible
only in the HALT mode.
Executed when EEPROM Write command is issued from the programming tool.
It is possible in either HALT or RUN mode. (See Note)
Basic Hardware and Function 67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
5. Operating System Overview
Special register SW55 is used to specify the number of Data registers to be stored in
the EEPROM. The allowable setting value is 0 to 2048.
The table below shows the correspondence between the SW55 value and Data
registers saved in the EEPROM.
SW55 setting
Range of Data registers saved
in EEPROM
Remarks
value
0
None
1
2
3
D0000 only
D0000 to D0001
D0000 to D0002
:
:
2047
2048
Others
D0000 to D2046
D0000 to D2047
D0000 to D2047
Default value
Regarded as 2048
When the EEPROM Write command is executed, the T1-16S checks the value of
SW55 and saves the Data registers into the EEPROM depending on the SW55 value.
The value of SW55 itself is also saved in the EEPROM.
At the initial load or the EEPROM Read command is executed, the T1-16S checks the
value for SW55 in the EEPROM and transfers the corresponding number of data to
the Data registers of the RAM.
NOTE
(1) The EEPROM has the life limit for writing. It is 100,000 times. Pay
attention not to exceed the limit. If the number of execution of
EEPROM Write command exceeds 100,000 times, EEPROM alarm
flag (S007) comes ON.
(2) Even in RUN mode, the EEPROM Write command can be executed.
However, in this case, only the user program is written into the
EEPROM. (D register data and setting information are not saved.)
(3) The data in the EEPROM can also be read or written by using the
program instruction (FUN236 XFER instruction).
(4) When the EEPROM writing is executed by the XFER instruction in the
user program, T1-16S does not update the internal EEPROM write
counts. Therefore the EEPROM alarm flag (S007) will not correspond
to this operation. Pay attention to the life limit of the EEPROM.
68 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
5. Operating System Overview
5.3 Scanning
The flowchart below shows the basic internal operations performed by the T1-16S
from the time power is turned on through program execution. As the diagram shows,
executing a program consists of continuous scanning operations. One scan is a cycle
starting with the self-diagnosis and ending with the completion of peripheral support.
Power ON
Hardware check
Power-up
Initialization
(approx. 1 s)
Initial load
Register/device
initialization
Self-diagnosis
HALT mode
Mode
control
RUN mode
At the first
scan
Register/device
initialization
Scan
At the first
scan
Scan cycle
Program check
I/O update
Timer update
User program
execution
Peripheral
support
Basic Hardware and Function 69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
5. Operating System Overview
Hardware check:
Performs checking and initialization of the system ROM, the system RAM and the
peripheral LSIs.
Initial load:
Transfers the user program and user data from the EEPROM to the RAM. (Refer to
section 5.2)
Register/device initialization:
Initializes registers and devices as shown below.
Register/device
Initialization
External input (X/XW)
Forced inputs are retained. Others are cleared to 0.
External output (Y/YW) Forced coil devices are retained. Others are cleared to 0.
Auxiliary device/register User specified retentive registers and forced coil devices
(R/RW)
are retained. Others are cleared to 0.
Special device/register Special setting data are retained. Others are cleared to 0.
(S/SW)
Timer device/register
(T./T)
User specified retentive registers are retained. Others are
cleared to 0.
Counter device/register User specified retentive registers are retained. Others are
(C./C)
cleared to 0.
Data register (D)
User specified retentive registers are retained. Others are
cleared to 0.
Index register (I, J, K)
Cleared to 0.
NOTE
(1) When the data stored in the EEPROM (Data registers) are used, these
registers should be specified as retentive. Otherwise, these data are
transferred from EEPROM to RAM, but then cleared to 0 at the
initialization.
(2) The data in the retentive registers are stored in RAM and backed up by
built-in capacitor and by the optional battery if used. The back-up
period is 1 hours or more at 25 °C. If optional battery (CR2032) is
used, the back-up period is 1 year or more at 25 °C.
The T1-16S checks the validity of the retentive data at the power-up
initialization, and if they are not valid, sets the special device (S00F) to
ON. Therefore, check the status of S00F in the user program and
initialize the retentive registers if S00F is ON.
(3) The retentive registers can be set by the programming tool for RW, T,
C and D registers. The registers from address 0 to the designated
address for each type are set as retentive registers. Refer to the
separate manual for the programming tool for setting the retentive
registers.
(4) The input force and the forced coil are functions for program
debugging. For details, refer to section 6.7.
70 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
5. Operating System Overview
Self-diagnosis:
Checks the proper operation of the T1-16S itself. If an error has detected and cannot
be recovered by re-tries, the T1-16S moves into ERROR mode. For the self-diagnosis
items, refer to section 10.2.
Mode control:
Checks the mode control switch status and the mode control request commands from
the programming tool.
The scan mode − floating scan or fixed-time scan − is also controlled hear.
NOTE
The floating scan:
When one scan is finished, immediately starts the next scan. The scan time
is shortest, but may vary depending on the program execution status.
Scan time
Scan time
Scan time
The fixed-time scan:
The scan operation is started every user-specified time. The time setting
range is 10 to 200 ms (10 ms units). If an actual scan needs longer time
than the setting time, it works as the floating scan.
Scan time (50 ms fixed) Scan time (50 ms fixed)
(idling)
(idling)
Program check:
At the beginning of the RUN mode, the user program is compiled and its validity is
checked.
I/O update:
Reads the external input signals into the external input devices/registers (X/XW), and
sends the data of the external output devices/registers (Y/YW) to the external output
circuits. Then the outputs (relays, etc.) changes the states and latches until the next
I/O update timing.
The states of the forced input devices are not updated by this operation.
Timer update:
Updates the timer registers which are activated in the user program, and the timing
devices (S040 to S047).
Basic Hardware and Function 71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
5. Operating System Overview
User program execution:
Executes the programmed instructions from the beginning to the END instruction.
This is the essential function of the T1-16S.
In this section, only the main program execution is mentioned. For other program
types, such as timer interrupt, etc., refer to section 6.5.
Peripheral support:
Supports the communications with the programming tool or external devices
connected by the computer link function. The time for this operation is limited within
approx. 2 ms in the floating scan mode, and within allowable idling time in the fixed-
time scan mode.
If the special relay S158 is set to ON, the peripheral support priority mode is selected.
In the peripheral support priority mode, the peripheral support time is not limited. As
the result, the communication response is improved although the scan time becomes
long at the time.
72 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
Section 6
Programming Information
6.1 Devices and registers, 74
6.2 Index modification, 86
6.3 Real-time clock/calendar, 88
6.4 I/O allocation, 89
6.5 T1-16S memory mode setting, 91
6.6 User program configuration, 92
6.7 Programming language, 98
6.8 Program execution sequence, 99
6.9 On-line debug support functions, 100
6.10 Password protection, 103
Basic Hardware and Function 73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
6. Programming Information
6.1 Devices and registers
The T1-16S program consists of bit-based instructions that handle ON/OFF
information, such as contact and coil instructions, and register-based (16-bit)
instructions, such as those for data transfer and arithmetic operations.
Devices are used to store the ON/OFF information of contacts and coils, and registers
are used to store 16-bit data.
Devices are divided into six types:
X
Y
R
S
External input devices
External output devices
Auxiliary relay devices
Special devices
T. Timer devices
C. Counter devices
Registers are divided into eight types:
XW
YW
RW
SW
T
External input registers
External output registers
Auxiliary relay registers
Special registers
Timer registers
C
Counter registers
D
Data registers
I, J, K Index registers
Device and register numbers
X devices share the same memory area as XW registers. Device X004, for example,
represents the number 4 bit in the XW00 register.
Bit position / Number
(MSB)
F
(LSB)
0
E D C B A
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
XW00
1
X004
Thus, "X004 is ON" means that bit number 4 of XW00 is 1.
Y, R, and S devices work in a similar manner.
74 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
6. Programming Information
Addressing devices
A device number of X, Y, R and S devices consist of a register number and bit position
as follows.
X 00 4
Represents bit position 0 to F in the register.
Decimal number representing the register containing the corresponding
device.
Represents the type of device. (X, Y, R, or S)
As for the timer (T.) and the counter (C.) devices, a device number is expressed as
follows.
T. 12
Corresponding register number. (decimal number)
Represents the type of device. (T. or C.)
Dot (.) is used to identify as device.
Addressing registers
A register number except the index registers is expressed as follows.
XW 01
Register number. (decimal number)
Represents the type of register. (XW, YW, RW, SW, T, C or D)
The index registers (I, J and K) do not have the number.
J
I, J, or K
Basic Hardware and Function 75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
6. Programming Information
Available address range
Device/register
Symbol
T1-16S
Number of points
Total 512 points
Address range
X000 - X31F
External input device
External output device
External input register
External output register
Auxiliary relay device
Auxiliary relay register
Special device
Special register
Timer device
Timer register
Counter device
X
Y
XW
YW
R
RW
S
SW
T.
T
C.
C
D
I
J
Y020 - Y31F
Total 32 words
XW00 - XW31
YW02 - YW31
R000 - R255F
RW000 - RW255
S000 - S63F
SW00 - SW63
T.000 - T.255
T000 - T255
C.000 - C.255
C000 - C255
D0000 - D4095
I (no address)
J (no address)
K (no address)
4096 points
256 words
1024 points
64 words
256 points
256 words
256 points
256 words
4096 words
1 word
Counter register
Data register
Index register
1 word
1 word
K
NOTE
(1) 1 word = 16 bits
(2) The available data range in each register is -32768 to 32767 (H8000 to
H7FFF) except for the timer and the counter registers.
The data range of the timer register is 0 to 32767. That of the counter
register is 0 to 65535.
(3) Double-word (32 bits) data is available in two consecutive registers.
In this case, lower address register stores the lower 16 bits data.
(MSB) F -------------0 F ------------ 0 (LSB)
D0101
D0100
Upper 16bits Lower 16bits
In this manual, a double-word register is expressed by using ‘⋅’.
For example, D0101⋅D0100.
76 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
6. Programming Information
External input devices (X)
These devices (X) indicate the ON/OFF states of external input signals through the
input circuits. External input devices can be used many times in a program.
External output devices (Y)
The external output devices (Y) store the ON/OFF signals that drive the external
devices through the output circuits. They can be used for coils in a program.
External input registers (XW)
These (XW) are 16-bit registers for storing values, which are received from the input
circuits.
External output registers (YW)
These 16-bit registers (YW) are used for storing values, which are sent to the output
circuits.
Auxiliary relay devices and registers (R/RW)
The auxiliary relay devices (R) are used to store intermediate results of sequences.
The auxiliary relay registers (RW) are used to store temporary results of function
instructions. The data in R/RW cannot be output directly to the output circuits. It is
necessary to move the data to Y/YW.
It is possible to make these registers retentive so that they retain data in the event of a
power failure. See section 5.3.
Timer devices and registers (T./T)
The timer registers (T) are used for storing the elapsed time of timer instructions, the
on-delay (TON), off-delay (TOF) and single-shot (SS) timers.
0.01 s base timers and 0.1 s base timers are provided.
Time base
0.01 s
T1-16S
T000 to T063
T064 to T255
0.1 s
The timer devices (T.) work as the output of the timer instructions.
It is possible to specify the T registers as retentive to retain their data in the event of a
power failure. See section 5.3.
Basic Hardware and Function 77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
6. Programming Information
Counter devices and registers (C./C)
The counter registers (C) are used for storing the count value of the counter (CNT)
and the up-down counter (U/D) instructions.
The counter devices (C.) work as the output of the counter instructions.
It is possible to specify the C registers as retentive to retain their data in the event of a
power failure. See section 5.3.
Data registers (D)
Functionally the data registers (D) are the same as auxiliary relay registers (RW)
except that the D registers cannot be used as devices.
A part of the data registers are saved in the built-in EEPROM as fixed data and
transferred into the RAM at the initial load.
The range of the data registers saved in the EEPROM can be specified by SW55.
See section 5.2.
It is possible to specify the D registers as retentive to retain their data in the event of a
power failure. See section 5.3.
Index registers (I, J, and K)
These index registers are used for indirect addressing for a register.
For example, if the value of I is 100 in the following register expression, it designates
D0100. For details, refer to section 6.2.
I
D0000
D0100 if I=100
78 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
6. Programming Information
Special devices and registers (S/SW)
The special devices (S) and special registers (SW) are used for special purposes. See
list below.
Device/
register
S000
S001
S002
S003
S004
S005
S006
S007
S008
Name
Function
0: Initialization
1: HALT mode
2: RUN mode
3: RUN-F mode
4: HOLD mode
6: ERROR mode
T1/T1S operation mode
CPU error (down)
I/O error (down)
ON at error state (related to SW01)
ON at error state (related to SW02)
ON at error state (related to SW03)
Program error (down)
EEPROM alarm (alarm)
Fixed-time scan time-over ON when actual scan time is longer than the setting
ON when EEPROM write exceeds 100,000 times
(alarm)
time as fixed-time scan
S009
S00A
Reserved
ON when clock/calendar data is illegal
−
Clock/calendar error
(alarm)
S00B
S00C
S00D
S00E
S00F
Reserved
Reserved
−
−
TL-F10 error (alarm)
−
Retentive data invalid
(alarm)
ON when TOSLINE-F10 transmission error occurs
Reserved
ON when retentive data in RAM are invalid
NOTE
(1) These devices are set by the T1-16S operating system. These devices
are read only for user.
(2) Devices marked as (down) are set in the ERROR mode. Therefore
these devices cannot be used in the user program.
(3) Devices marked as (alarm) are set in the normal operation mode.
These devices can be used in the user program.
Basic Hardware and Function 79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
6. Programming Information
Device/
register
S010
Name
Function
System ROM error (down) ON at error state
System RAM error (down) ON at error state
S011
S012
Program memory error
ON at error state
(down)
S013
S014
S015
S016
S017
S018
S019
S01A
S01B
S01C
S01D
S01E
S01F
EEPROM error (down)
ON at error state
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
ON at error state
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Watchdog timer error
(down)
S020
S021
S022
S023
S024
S025
S026
S027
S028
S029
S02A
S02B
S02C
S02D
S02E
S02F
Reserved
ON at error state
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
−
I/O mismatch (down)
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
NOTE
(1) These devices are set by the T1-16S operating system. These devices
are read only for user.
(2) Devices marked as (down) are set in the ERROR mode. Therefore
these devices cannot be used in the user program.
80 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
6. Programming Information
Device/
register
S030
S031
S032
S033
S034
S035
S036
S037
S038
S039
S03A
S03B
S03C
S03D
S03E
S03F
S040
S041
S042
S043
S044
S045
S046
S047
S048
S049
S04A
S04B
S04C
S04D
S04E
S04F
Name
Program error
Function
ON at error state (related to SW06)
ON when the scan time exceeds 200 ms
Scan time over (down)
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Timing relay 0.1 s
Timing relay 0.2 s
Timing relay 0.4 s
Timing relay 0.8 s
Timing relay 1.0 s
Timing relay 2.0 s
Timing relay 4.0 s
Timing relay 8.0 s
OFF 0.05 s / ON 0.05 s (0.1 s interval)
OFF 0.1 s / ON 0.1 s (0.2 s interval)
OFF 0.2 s / ON 0.2 s (0.4 s interval)
OFF 0.4 s / ON 0.4 s (0.8 s interval)
OFF 0.5 s / ON 0.5 s (1.0 s interval)
OFF 1.0 s / ON 1.0 s (2.0 s interval)
OFF 2.0 s / ON 2.0 s (4.0 s interval)
OFF 4.0 s / ON 4.0 s (8.0 s interval)
Reserved
All OFF at the
beginning of
RUN mode
−
−
−
−
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Always OFF
Always ON
−
−
Always OFF
Always ON
NOTE
(1) These devices are set by the T1-16S operating system. These devices
are read only for user.
(2) Devices marked as (down) are set in the ERROR mode. Therefore
these devices cannot be used in the user program.
Basic Hardware and Function 81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
6. Programming Information
Device/
register
S050
Name
CF (carry flag)
Function
Used for instructions which manipulate carry
S051
ERF (instruction error flag) ON when instruction execution error is occurred
(related to alarm flags of SW06)
S052
S053
S054
S055
S056
S057
S058
S059
S05A
S05B
S05C
S05D
S05E
S05F
S060
S061
S062
S063
S064
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
ON when illegal instruction is detected
Reserved
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Illegal instruction (down)
−
−
−
Reserved
Reserved
Boundary error (alarm)
ON when illegal address is designated by indirect
addressing (operation continued)
S065
S066
S067
S068
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
−
−
−
Division error (alarm)
ON when error occurs in division instruction (operation
continued)
S069
S06A
S06B
BCD data error (alarm)
ON when BCD data error has detected in BCD
operation instructions (operation continued)
ON when table size error has detected in table
operation instructions (operation continued) (T1S only)
Table operation error
(alarm)
Encode error (alarm)
ON when error occurs in encode instruction (operation
continued)
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
S06C
S06D
S06E
S06F
−
−
−
−
NOTE
(1) Devices marked as (down) are set in the ERROR mode. Therefore
these devices cannot be used in the user program.
(2) CF, ERF and devices marked as (alarm) can be reset by the user
program.
82 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
6. Programming Information
Device/
register
SW07
Name
Function
Clock/calendar (Year)
Lower 2 digits of the calendar year
(01, 02, ... )
SW08
SW09
SW10
SW11
SW12
SW13
Clock/calendar (Month)
Clock/calendar (Day)
Clock/calendar (Hour)
Clock/calendar (Minute)
Clock/calendar (Second) Second (00, 01, ... 59)
Clock/calendar (Week)
Month (01, 02, ... 12)
Day (01, 02, ... 31)
Hour (00, 01, ... 59)
Minute (00, 01, ... 59)
They are stored in
the lower 8 bits by
BCD code
Day of the week
(Sun = 00, Mon = 01, ... Sat = 06)
SW14
SW15
SW16
Reserved
−
Peripheral support priority Bit 8 (S158) is used to select peripheral support priority
Mode of special input
functions
Used to select the special input functions
SW17
SW18
SW19
SW20
SW21
SW22
SW23
SW24
Input filter constant
Preset values for high
speed counter
Used to set the input filter constant
Used to set the preset values for high speed counters
Count values for high
speed counter
High speed counter control Control flags for the high speed counters
flags
Present count values of the high speed counters are
stored
SW25
SW26
Reserved
−
Mode of special output
functions
Used to select the special output functions
SW27
SW28
Special output control flags Control flags for the pulse/PWM output
Special output frequency
setting
Output frequency setting for the pulse/PWM output
SW29
SW30
SW31
SW32
SW33
SW34
SW35
SW36
PWM output duty setting
Analog setting value 1
Analog setting value 2
−
Pulse duty setting for the PWM output
Input value of the analog setting adjuster V0
Input value of the analog setting adjuster V1
Reserved
Reserved
−
TL-F10 send data
TL-F10 receive data
PRG port station address
TOSLINE-F10 transmission data (send to master)
TOSLINE-F10 transmission data (receive from master)
Used to set the programmer port station address
(1 to 32)
SW37
SW38
PRG port parity
Used to set the programmer port parity (0=none,
1=odd)
Used to set the programmer port response delay time
(0 to 30: 0 to 300ms)
PRG port response delay
NOTE
(1) These devices are set by the T1-16S operating system. These devices
are read only for user.
(2) Devices marked as (down) are set in the ERROR mode. Therefore
these devices cannot be used in the user program.
Basic Hardware and Function 83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
6. Programming Information
Device/
register
S390
Name
Function
Timer interrupt execution
status
ON during execution
S391
S392
S393
S394
I/O interrupt #1 execution ON during execution
status
I/O interrupt #2 execution ON during execution
status
I/O interrupt #3 execution ON during execution
status
I/O interrupt #4 execution ON during execution
status
S395
S396
S397
S398
S399
S39A
S39B
S39C
S39D
S39E
S39F
S400
S401
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
HOLD device
ON during HOLD mode (setting by user program is also
available)
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
S402
S403
S404
S405
S406
S407
S408
S409
S40A
S40B
S40C
S40D
S40E
S40F
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
84 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
6. Programming Information
Device/
register
SW41
Name
Function
Sub-program #1 execution Bit 0 (S410) is ON during the sub-program #1 is
status
executed
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
SW42
SW43
SW44
SW45
SW46
SW47
SW48
SW49
SW50
SW51
SW52
SW53
SW54
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Basic unit I/O LED display Used to display the selected I/O module status
mode
(0 = Basic unit, 1 to 8 = I/O module slot 0 to 7,
9 and 10 = TOSLINE-F10)
SW55
SW56
Number of EEPROM write Used to set the number of data registers to be saved in
data
the EEPROM (0 to 2048, initial value is 2048)
Used to set the RS-485 port operation mode
(0 = Computer link, 1 = Data link, 2 = Free ASCII,
3 = Inverter connection)
RS-485 port operation
mode
SW57
SW58
RS-485 port response
delay
RS-485 port Free ASCII
Used to set the RS-485 port response delay time
(0 to 30: 0 to 300ms)
Used for the RS-485 port Free ASCII function
flags
SW59
SW60
SW61
SW62
SW63
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
−
−
−
−
−
NOTE
(1) For details of SW54, refer to section 1.5.1.
(2) For details of SW55, refer to section 5.2.
(3) For details of SW56 through SW58, refer to the Communication
function manual.
Basic Hardware and Function 85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
6. Programming Information
6.2 Index modification
When registers are used as operands of instructions, the method of directly
designating the register address as shown in Example 1) below is called ‘direct
addressing’.
As opposed to this, the method of indirectly designating the register by combination
with the contents of the index register (I, J, or K) as shown in Example 2) below is
called ‘indirect addressing’. In particular, in this case, since the address is modified
using an index register, this is called ‘index modification’.
Example 1)
[ RW10 MOV D1000 ]
Data transfer instruction
Transfer data of RW10 to D1000
Example 2)
I
J
[ RW10 MOV D0000 ]
Data transfer instruction (with index modification)
Transfer data of RW(10 + I) to D(0000 + J)
(If I = 3 and J = 200, the data of RW13 is transferred to D0200)
There are 3 types of index register, I, J and K. Each type processes 16-bit integers
(-32768 to 32767). There are no particular differences in function between these 3
types of index register.
There is no special instruction for substituting values in these index registers. These
are designated as destination of data transfer instructions, etc.
[ 00064 MOV I ]
(substitutes 64 in index register I)
[ D0035 MOV J ]
[ RW20 + 00030 → K ]
(substitutes the data of D0035 in index register J)
(substitutes the result of addition in index register K)
NOTE
(1) The index modification is available for RW, T, C and D registers.
(2) If index registers are used as a double-length register, only the
combinations J×I and K×J are allowed.
86 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
6. Programming Information
The followings are examples of index modifications.
When I = 0, it designates RW10.
I
When I = 1, it designates RW11.
When I = -1, it designates RW09.
When I = 10, it designates RW20.
When I = -10, it designates RW00.
RW10
When J = 0, it designates D0201⋅D0200.
When J = 1, it designates D0202⋅D0201.
When J = 2, it designates D0203⋅D0202.
When J = -1, it designates D0200⋅D0199.
When J = -2, it designates D0199⋅D0198.
J
D0201⋅D0200
Be careful that the registers do not exceed the address range by the index
modification. The address range is not checked by the T1-16S.
!
CAUTION
NOTE
Substitutions of values into index registers and index modifications can be
used any times in a program. Normally, the program will be easier to see if
a value substitution into an index register is positioned immediately before
the index modification.
Basic Hardware and Function 87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
6. Programming Information
6.3 Real-time clock/calendar (Enhanced model only)
The T1-16S enhanced model is equipped with the real-time clock/calendar for year,
month, day, day of the week, hour, minute, and second.
These data are stored in the special registers SW07 to SW13 by 2-digit BCD format
as follows.
Register
SW07
SW08
SW09
SW10
SW11
SW12
SW13
Function
Year
Month
Day
Data
1999 = H0099, 2000 = H0000, 2001 = H0001, 2002 = H0002 ...
Jan. = H0001, Feb. = H0002, Mar. = H0003, ... Dec. = H0012
1st = H0001, 2nd = H0002, 3rd = H0003, ... 31st = H0031
H0000, H0001, H0002, ... H0022, H0023
H0000, H0001, H0002, ... H0058, H0059
H0000, H0001, H0002, ... H0058, H0059
Hour
Minute
Second
Week
Sun. = H0000, Mon. = H0001, Tue. = H0002, ... Sat. = H0006
Program example:
In the following circuit, output Y030 turns ON for 1 minute at every Sunday 6 pm.
(H0018)
Clock/calendar back up:
The clock/calendar continues updating even while the power to the T1-16S is off by
built-in capacitor and by the optional battery (CR2032) if used. Its buck-up period is as
follows.
Expected value
Guarantee value
Environment
temperature
Under 30 °C (86 °F)
Over 30 °C (86 °F)
Capacitor
Battery
2 year
1 year
Capacitor
1 hours
Battery
1 year
2 hours
1 hours
30 minutes
6 months
As shown in the table, it is recommended to use the optional battery when the real-
time clock/calendar function is used.
In the T1-16S, the validity of the clock/calendar is checked. If the data is not valid by
excess power off period, special relay S00A is set to ON. Therefore, when the
clock/calendar is used, it is recommended to check the status of S00A in the user
program.
Setting the clock/calendar:
To set the clock/calendar data, the following 2 ways are available. In both cases, the
week data is automatically calculated.
(1) Setting the clock/calendar data on the system information screen of the
programming tool.
(2) Using the Calendar Set instruction (CLND) in the user program.
88 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
6. Programming Information
6.4 I/O allocation
The external input signals are allocated to the external input devices/registers (X/XW).
The external output signals are allocated to the external output devices/registers
(Y/YW).
The register numbers of the external input and output registers are consecutive. Thus
one register number can be assigned for either input or output.
As for the T1-16S basic unit, I/O allocation is fixed as follows.
Inputs: 8 points (X000 - X007)
T1-16S
Outputs: 8 points (Y020 - Y027)
X000 --- X007 Y020---- Y027
Any operations for the I/O allocation are not required if only the T1-16S basic unit is
used.
However, if the I/O modules are used with the T1-16S, the I/O allocation operation is
necessary. Refer to the separate manual "T1-16S User's Manual - I/O Modules -".
Basic Hardware and Function 89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
6. Programming Information
Internally, the T1-16S has information called ‘I/O allocation table’ in its memory. This
I/O allocation table shows the correspondence between I/O hardware and software,
i.e. register/device.
The contents of the I/O allocation table are as follows.
Unit
Slot
PU
0
I/O type
X+Y 4W
PU slot must be blank
Slot 0 is for basic unit (XW00, XW01, YW02
and YW03 are assigned internally)
1
2
0
3
4
5
Slots 1 to 7 of unit 0 are not used
(must be blank)
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
1
These slots are for I/O modules
5
6
7
The T1-16S operating system automatically sets the I/O type ‘X+Y 4W’ on the slot 0 at
unit 0 position when the memory clear is executed for the T1-16S.
When the T1-16S program is developed in off-line, the above I/O allocation table
should be set before programming. For this operation (called manual I/O allocation),
refer to the programming tool manual.
NOTE
(1) Unit base address setting function is not supported by the T1-16S.
Do not use this function with the T1-16S. It will causes malfunction.
(2) When the TOSLINE-F10 station module FR112M is used, allocate it at
the end of the I/O modules.
90 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
6. Programming Information
6.5 T1-16S memory mode setting
The program capacity of the T1-16S is 8 k steps. However, user can set the T1-16S’s
program capacity to 4 k steps. It is called the T1-16S’s memory mode.
That is, the T1-16S has two memory modes, 8 k mode and 4 k mode.
In the 4 k mode, on-line program changes become available, although the program
capacity is limited to 4 k steps. Refer to section 6.9 for the on-line debug support
functions.
To set the T1-16S’s memory mode, write 4 k or 8 k on the Program Size Setting of the
System Parameters using the programming tool. Then execute the EEPROM write
command.
Basic Hardware and Function 91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
6. Programming Information
6.6 User program configuration
A group of instructions for achieving the PLC-based control system is called ‘user
program’. The T1-16S has 8 k steps capacity for storing the user program.
A ‘step’ is the minimum unit, which composes an instruction. Number of steps required
for one instruction is depending on the type of instruction. Refer to section 7.1.
The figure below shows the T1-16S’s memory configuration.
RAM
System information
User program
4 k or 8 k steps
Back-up area
by EEPROM
Data registers
mentioned in
section 5.2
Other registers/
devices
NOTE
For conditions of transfer between RAM and EEPROM, see section 5.2.
92 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
6. Programming Information
System information
System information is the area which stores execution control parameters. The
following contents are included in the system information.
(1) Machine parameters (hardware type, memory type)
(2) User program information (program ID, system comments, number of steps used)
(3) Passwords
(4) Retentive register area information
(5) T1S program memory mode, 4 k steps or 8 k steps
(6) Execution control parameters (scan mode, timer interrupt interval)
(7) Station number setting for programmer port (T1), or RS-485 port communication
parameters (Enhanced model)
(8) I/O allocation table
(9) Input force table
The system information is stored in the built-in EEPROM. Therefore, when this
information is modified, the EEPROM write operation is necessary. Otherwise, these
are over-written by original EEPROM contents at the next initial load timing.
User program
The T1-16S has a capacity of 8 k steps of the user program.
The user program is stored by each program types as shown in the following diagram,
and is managed by units called blocks in each program types.
User program configuration
(Program types)
Program type internal configuration
(Blocks)
Block 1
Main program
Sub-program #1
Block 2
Timer interrupt
I/O interrupt #1
I/O interrupt #2
I/O interrupt #3
I/O interrupt #4
Block 10
Block N
(N = max. 256)
Block 1
Subroutine
Basic Hardware and Function 93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
6. Programming Information
In the user program, the main program is the core. The scan operation explained in
section 5.3 is for the main program. The operation of other program types are
explained in the following sections.
The following 8 program types are supported by the T1-16S.
(1) Main program
(2) Sub-program #1
(3) Timer interrupt program
(4) I/O interrupt program #1
(5) I/O interrupt program #2
(6) I/O interrupt program #3
(7) I/O interrupt program #4
(8) Subroutine
The blocks are just separators of the program, and have no effect on the program
execution. However, by dividing the user program into some blocks, the program
becomes easy to understand. The block numbers need not be consecutive.
In each program type and block, there is no limit of program capacity. The only limit is
the total capacity.
6.6.1 Main program
The main program is the core of the user program. It is executed once in each scan.
1 scan time
Main program
Mode I/O Timer
Main program
Time
Mode I/O Timer
In the above figure,
Mode means the mode control operation
I/O means the I/O update processing
Timer means the timer up date processing
Main program means the main program execution
the self-diagnostic check and peripheral support are omitted in this figure.
The end of the main program is recognized by the END instruction.
Although instructions may be present after the END instruction, these portions will not
be executed.
94 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
6. Programming Information
6.6.2 Sub-program #1
If the sub-program #1 is programmed, it is executed once at the beginning of the first
scan (before main program execution).
Therefore, the sub-program #1 can be used to set the initial value into the registers.
The sub-program #1 is called the initial program.
The figure below shows the first scan operation.
RUN mode
transition
2nd scan
1st scan
Main program
I/O Timer Sub#1
Main program
Mode I/O Timer
Time
The end of the sub-program #1 is recognized by the END instruction.
6.6.3 Timer interrupt program
The timer interrupt is the highest priority task. It is executed cyclically with a user
specified interval, with suspending other operation.
The interrupt interval is set in the system information. (5 to 1000 ms, 5 ms units)
1 scan
1 scan
1 scan
1 scan
Scan
Timer interrupt
Timer interrupt
interval
Timer interrupt
interval
Time
The end of the timer interrupt is recognized by the IRET instruction.
Basic Hardware and Function 95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
6. Programming Information
6.6.4 I/O interrupt programs
The I/O interrupt program is also the highest priority task. It is executed immediately
when the interrupt factor is generated, with suspending other operation.
The following 4 types I/O interrupt programs are supported in the T1/T1S.
(1) I/O interrupt #1
The I/O interrupt #1 is used with the high speed counter function. When the count
value reaches the preset value, etc., the I/O interrupt #1 is activated immediately
with suspending other operation. The end of the I/O interrupt #1 is recognized by
the IRET instruction. For detailed information, refer to section 8.3.
(2) I/O interrupt #2
The I/O interrupt #2 is also used with the high speed counter function. Refer to
section 8.3 for details.
(3) I/O interrupt #3
The I/O interrupt #3 is used with the interrupt input function. When the state of the
interrupt input is changed from OFF to ON (or ON to OFF), the I/O interrupt #3 is
activated immediately with suspending other operation. The end of the I/O
interrupt #3 is also recognized by the IRET instruction. For detailed information,
refer to section 8.4.
(4) I/O interrupt #4
The I/O interrupt #4 is also used with the interrupt input function. Refer to section
8.4 for details.
If an interrupt factor is generated while other interrupt program is executing (including
the timer interrupt), the interrupt factor is held. Then it will be activated after finishing
the other interrupt program execution.
If two or more interrupt factors are generated at the same time, the priority is as
follows.
Timer > I/O #1 > I/O #2 > I/O #3 > I/O #4
96 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
6. Programming Information
6.6.5 Subroutines
In the program type ‘Subroutine’, The following number of subroutines can be
programmed.
The T1-16S supports up to 256 subroutines.
The subroutine is not a independent program. It is called from other program types
(main program, sub-program, interrupt program) and from other subroutines.
One subroutine is started with the SUBR instruction, and ended by the RET
instruction.
It is necessary to assign a subroutine number to the SUBR instruction. The available
subroutine numbers are 0 to 255.
[ SUBR (000) ]
Subroutine number
The RET instruction has no subroutine number.
The instruction that calls a registered subroutine is the CALL instruction. The CALL
instruction has the subroutine number to be called.
[ CALL N.000 ]
Subroutine number
Main program
[ CALL N.000 ]
Subroutine
Execution
flow
[ SUBR (000) ]
[ RET ]
NOTE
(1) Multiple subroutines can be programmed in a block. However, one
subroutine in one block is recommended.
(2) From the inside of a subroutine, other subroutines can be called
(nesting). Its allowable level is up to 3 levels.
Basic Hardware and Function 97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
6. Programming Information
6.7 Programming language
The programming language of the T1-16S is ‘ladder diagram’.
Ladder diagram is a language, which composes program using relay symbols as a
base in an image similar to a hard-wired relay sequence. In the T1/T1S, in order to
achieve an efficient data-processing program, ladder diagram which are combinations
of relay symbols and function blocks are used.
The ladder diagram program is constructed by units called ‘rung’. A rung is defined as
one network which is connected each other.
Rung number
1
Rung
2
3
The rung numbers are a series of numbers (decimal number) starting from 1, and
cannot be skipped. There is no limit to the number of rungs.
The size of any one rung is limited to 11 lines × 12 columns.
A example of a ladder diagram program is shown below.
When X005 is ON or the data of D0100 is greater than 200, Y027 comes ON.
Y027 stays ON even if X005 is OFF and the data of D0100 is 200 or less.
Y027 will come OFF when X006 comes ON.
98 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
6. Programming Information
6.8 Program execution sequence
The instructions execution sequence is shown below.
(1) They are executed in the sequence from block 1 through the final block, which
contains the END instruction (or IRET in an interrupt program).
(2) They are executed in the sequence from rung 1 through the final rung in a block
(or the END instruction).
(3) They are executed according to the following rules in any one rung.
When there is no vertical
connection, they are
executed from left to right.
1
2
3
4
4
7
1
5
2
3
6
When there is an OR
connection, the OR logic
portion is executed first.
When there is a branch, they
are executed in the order from
the upper line to the lower line.
1
2
3
3
5
4
6
1
2
7
4
6
5
8
A combination of
above.
and
The instructions execution sequence in which function instructions are included also
follows the above rules. However, for program execution control instructions, such as
jumps (JCS), loops (FOR-NEXT), subroutines (CALL-SUBR-RET), it will depend the
specifications of each instruction.
Basic Hardware and Function 99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
6. Programming Information
6.9 On-line debug support functions
The following on-line (during RUN) functions are supported in the T1-16S for effective
program debugging.
On-line function
Force function
4 k mode
Yes
8 k mode
Yes
Sampling trace function
Changing timer /counter
preset value
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Changing constant operand of
function instruction
Changing device directly
Program changing in edit
mode
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
EEPROM write command
Yes
Yes
NOTE
Refer to section 6.5 for 4 k/8 k mode.
Force function
Two types of force functions are available, input force and coil force.
The input force is used to disable the external input signals. When an external input
device is designated as forced input, the ON/OFF state of the device can be changed
manually by using the data setting function of the programming tool, regardless of the
corresponding external signal state. The input force designation is available for the
external input devices (X).
The coil force is used to disable the coil instruction. When a coil instruction on the
program is designated as forced coil, the ON/OFF state of the coil device can be
changed manually by using the data setting function of the programming tool,
regardless of the coil circuit execution status.
On the programming tool, the forced input and forced coil are expressed as follows.
Forced input
X005
x005
Normal
Y023
Forced
Y023
Forced coil
Normal
Forced
NOTE
If EEPROM write operation is executed with remaining the force
designation, the force designation is also saved into the built-in EEPROM.
Because the force function is debugging function, release all force
designation before executing the EEPROM write operation. The force batch
release command is available when the T1-16S is in HALT mode.
100 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
6. Programming Information
Sampling trace function
The sampling trace function collects the status of specified devices or register at every
specified sampling timing. The collected data can be displayed on the programmer
(T-PDS) screen in the format of timing chart (for devices) or trend graph (for register).
The minimum sampling timing is the T1-16S’s scan cycle.
This function is useful for program debugging and troubleshooting.
T1-16S
Sampling target
Devices (up to 8) and
Registers (up to 3)
256 times
Sampling capacity
The collected data is stored in the T1-16S internal buffer.
The buffer works as a ring buffer, and latest collected data can be displayed.
The sampling start/stop condition (arm condition) and the collection timing (trigger
condition) can be specified by status changing of devices.
For detailed key operations for arm/trigger conditions setting on the T-PDS, refer to
the manual for T-PDS.
T-PDS screen example of device timing chart
NOTE
(1) On the T-PDS, select ‘3 registers + 8 devices’ as the sampling type.
(2) As the arm and trigger conditions, register values cannot be used.
(3) The After times setting is not effective for the T1-16S.
Basic Hardware and Function 101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
6. Programming Information
Timer/counter preset value (constant data) changing
The preset value (constant data) of timer or counter instruction can be changed in on-
line (during RUN) by using the programming tool.
Function instruction constant operand changing
The constant operand of function instruction can be changed in on-line (during RUN)
by using the programming tool.
Device changing
The device of contact or coil instruction can be changed in on-line (during RUN) by
using the programming tool.
On-line program changing
When the T1S’s memory mode is 4 k mode, the program can be changed using
normal edit mode. (rung by rung)
In the on-line program changing, it is not allowed to change the number or order of the
following instructions.
END, MCS, MCR, JCS, JCR, FOR, NEXT, CALL, SUBR, RET, IRET
NOTE
The above on-line functions are performed on the RAM memory. Therefore,
when program has been changed, execute the EEPROM write operation
before turning off power. Otherwise, program stored in the EEPROM will be
overwritten.
On-line EEPROM write
The EEPROM write is possible in on-line (during RUN) as well as in HALT mode.
In the on-line EEPROM write, user data is not written into the EEPROM.
During this operation, the T1-16S’s scan time becomes longer. However, as it has the
time limit per scan, the T1-16S’s control operation is not stopped.
102 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
6. Programming Information
6.10 Password protection
The T1-16S has the password function to protect the user program and data from
unauthorized operations.
There are four levels of protection. Accordingly, three levels of passwords can be
registered to control the protection levels.
These passwords are stored in the built-in EEPROM. Therefore, if you entered,
changed or cleared the passwords, the EEPROM write operation is necessary.
The outline of the protection levels are shown below. For details, refer to the manual
for the programming tool.
Protection level 4 (disabled functions)
• Writing register/device data
• Writing system information
• I/O allocation
Protection level 3 (disabled functions)
• Reading program
• Program write into EEPROM
Strict
Protection level 2 (disabled functions)
• Clear memory
• Writing/loading program
• T1/T1S operation mode changes (by programming tool)
• Setting/changing passwords
Protection level 1 (disabled functions)
• None (all functions are available)
When the level 1, 2 and 3 passwords are registered, the T1-16S will be started as
protection level 4. In this state, for example, entering the level 2 password changes
the protection level to 2.
NOTE
When you use the password function, do not forget the level 1 password.
Otherwise, you cannot change/release the registered passwords.
Basic Hardware and Function 103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
104 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
Section 7
Instructions
7.1 List of instructions, 106
7.2 Instruction specifications, 116
Basic Hardware and Function 105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
7.1 List of instructions
The T1-16S has 21 types of basic ladder instructions and 97 types of function
instructions as listed below. The specifications of each instruction will be described in
detail later.
The tables listing these instructions are provided as a quick reference. (Note: In the
following table, italic character means operand, i.e. register, device or constant value.)
Basic ladder instructions
Speed
(µs)
FUN
No.
Name
Expression
Function
Steps
Page
NO contact
NO (normally open) contact of
device A.
NC (normally closed) contact
of device A.
Turns ON output for 1 scan
when input changes from OFF
to ON.
A
A
−
−
−
1
1
1.4 - 3.3 117
NC contact
1.4 - 3.3 118
Transitional
contact (rising)
1
3.0
119
Transitional
contact (falling)
Turns ON output for 1 scan
when input changes from ON
to OFF.
−
1
1
1
3.0
2.3
2.3
120
121
122
Coil
A
Relay coil of device A.
−
−
Forced coil
A
Forced coil of device A. State
of device A is retained
regardless of the input state.
Inverter
I
Inverts the input state.
1
1
1.4 - 3.3 123
−
−
Invert coil
Stores the inverse state of
input into device A.
A
I
2.3
124
Positive pulse
contact
Turns ON output for 1 scan
when input is ON and device A
changes from OFF to ON.
Turns ON output for 1 scan
when input is ON and device A
changes from ON to OFF.
Turns ON device A for 1 scan
when input changes from OFF
to ON.
A
P
−
−
−
−
−
1
1
1
1
125
Negative pulse
contact
A
N
126
127
128
Positive pulse coil
Negative pulse coil
ON delay timer
A
P
A
N
Turns ON device A for 1 scan
when input changes from ON
to OFF.
Turns ON output when the
time specified by A has
elapsed after the input came
ON. B is a timer register.
Turns OFF output when the
time specified by A has
elapsed after the input came
OFF. B is a timer register.
Turns ON output for the time
specified by A when the input
comes ON. B is a timer
register.
−[ A TON B ]−
−[ A TOF B ]−
−[ A SS B ]−
2
2
2
12.6
12.8
13.0
129
130
131
OFF delay timer
Single shot timer
−
−
106 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
Basic ladder instructions (continued)
Speed
Page
(µs)
FUN
No.
Name
Counter
Expression
Function
Steps
2
C
E
CNT
A B
Q
Counts the number of cycles
the count input (C) comes ON
while the enable input (E) is
ON, and turns ON output (Q)
when the count reaches to the
value specified by A. B is a
counter register.
Turns OFF power rail between
MCS and MCR when MCS
input is OFF.
−
22.6
132
133
Master control set
3.75
(in a
pair)
2.75
(in a
pair)
−−[ MCS ]−
−−[ MCR ]−
1
1
1
1
−
−
Master control reset
Jump control set
Jumps from JCS to JCR when
JCS input is ON.
−−[ JCS ]−
−−[ JCR ]−
−
−
134
135
Jump control reset
End
Indicates end of main program
or sub-program.
−−[ END ]−
−
1
1.4
Data transfer instructions
Speed
(µs)
FUN
No.
018 Data transfer
019 Double-word
data transfer
Name
Expression
Function
Steps
Page
136
−[ A MOV B ]−
−[ A+1⋅A DMOV B+1⋅B ]−
3
3
4.2
Transfers data of A to B.
Transfers double-word data
of A+1⋅A to B+1⋅B.
Transfers bit-inverted data of
A to B.
7.2
137
−[ A NOT B ]−
020 Invert transfer
3
3
3
4.6
6.5
138
139
140
−[ A XCHG B ]−
−[ A TINZ (n) B ]−
022 Data exchange
024 Table initialize
Exchanges data of A with B.
Transfers data of A to n
registers starting with B.
Transfers data of n registers
starting with A to n registers
starting with B.
Transfers bit-inverted data of
n registers starting with A to
n registers starting with B.
Transfers data from the
register specified by B in the
table, size n starting with A,
to C.
−[ A TMOV (n) B ]−
−[ A TNOT (n) B ]−
−[ A MPX (n) B → C ]−
025 Table transfer
3
3
141
142
026 Table invert
transfer
090 Multiplexer
5
5
70.6
71.5
176
177
−[ A DPX (n) B → C ]−
091 Demultiplexer
Transfers data from A to the
register specified by B in the
table, size n starting with C.
Basic Hardware and Function 107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
Arithmetic operations
Speed
(µs)
FUN
No.
027 Addition
Name
Expression
Function
Steps
Page
143
−[ A + B → C ]−
Adds data of A and B, and
stores the result in C.
Subtracts data of B from A,
and stores the result in C.
Multiplies data of A and B,
and stores the result in
double-length register C+1⋅C.
Divides data of A by B, and
stores the quotient in C and
the reminder in C+1.
Adds data of A+1⋅A and
B+1⋅B, and stores the result
in C+1⋅C.
4
4
6.5
−[ A - B → C ]−
028 Subtraction
029 Multiplication
6.5
144
−[ A ∗ B → C+1⋅C ]−
4
4
4
8.8
9.7
145
146
147
−[ A / B → C ]−
030 Division
−[ A+1⋅A D+ B+1⋅B → C+1⋅C ]−
031 Double-word
addition
11.6
−[ A+1⋅A D- B+1⋅B → C+1⋅C ]−
032 Double-word
subtraction
Subtracts data of B+1⋅B from
A+1⋅A, and stores the result
in C+1⋅C.
4
4
11.7
9.7
148
149
−[ A +C B → C ]−
035 Addition with
carry
Adds data of A, B and the
carry, and stores the result in
C. The carry flag changes
according to the result.
Subtracts data of B and the
carry from A, and stores the
result in C. The carry flag
changes according to the
result.
−[ A -C B → C ]−
036 Subtraction
with carry
4
9.7
150
−[ A U∗ B → C+1⋅C ]−
−[ A U/ B → C ]−
039 Unsigned
multiplication
Multiplies data of A and B,
and stores the result in
double-length register C+1⋅C.
(Unsigned integer operation)
Divides data of A by B, and
stores the quotient in C and
the reminder in C+1.
4
4
4
151
152
153
040 Unsigned
division
(Unsigned integer operation)
−[ A+1⋅A DIV B → C ]−
041 Unsigned
double/single
division
Divides data of A+1⋅A by B,
and stores the quotient in C
and the reminder in C+1.
(Unsigned integer operation)
Increments data of A by 1.
Decrements data of A by 1.
15.3
−[ +1 A ]−
−[ -1 A ]−
043 Increment
044 Decrement
2
2
4.6
4.6
154
155
108 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
Logical operations
Speed
Page
(µs)
FUN
Name
No.
048 AND
Expression
Function
Steps
−[ A AND B → C ]−
−[ A OR B → C ]−
−[ A EOR B → C ]−
−[ A TEST B ]−
Finds logical AND of A and B,
and stores it in C.
Finds logical OR of A and B,
and stores it in C.
Finds logical exclusive OR of A
and B, and stores it in C.
Turns ON output if logical AND
of A and B is not 0.
4
4
4
3
5.7
5.7
5.7
5.0
156
157
158
163
050 OR
052 Exclusive OR
064 Bit test
Shift operations
Speed
(µs)
FUN
Name
No.
1 bit shift right
068
Expression
Function
Steps
2
Page
164
−[ SHR1 A ]−
Shifts data of A 1 bit to the right
(LSB direction). The carry flag
changes according to the result.
Shifts data of A 1 bit to the left
(MSB direction). The carry flag
changes according to the result.
Shifts data of A n bits to the
right (LSB direction) and stores
the result in B. The carry flag
changes according to the result.
Shifts data of A n bits to the left
(MSB direction) and stores the
result in B. The carry flag
changes according to the result.
When shift input (S) comes ON,
shifts the data of specified shift
register 1 bit to the left, and
stores data input (D) state into
A. This operation is enabled
while enable input (E) is ON.
The carry flag changes
6.8
−[ SHL1 A ]−
1 bit shift left
069
2
4
6.8
165
166
−[ A SHR n → B ]−
n bit shift right
070
10.2
10.2
−[ A SHL n → B ]−
n bit shift left
071
4
3
167
168
D
S
E
SR
Q
Shift register
074
(n)
A
65.9 -
76.2
according to the result.
Shift register: n devices starting
with device A.
D
S
E
L
DSR
(n)
Q
Bi-directional
shift register
When shift input (S) comes ON,
shifts the data of specified shift
register 1 bit to the left or to the
right depending on direction
input (L). This operation is
enabled while enable input (E) is
ON. The carry flag changes
according to the result.
075
A
69.0 -
79.3
3
170
Shift register: n devices starting
with device A.
Direction: Left when L is ON,
right when L is OFF
Basic Hardware and Function 109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
Rotate operations
Speed
(µs)
FUN
No.
078 1 bit rotate
right
Name
Expression
Function
Steps
2
Page
172
−[ RTR1 A ]−
Rotates data of A 1 bit to the
right (LSB direction). The
carry flag changes according
to the result.
Rotates data of A 1 bit to the
left (MSB direction). The
carry flag changes according
to the result.
Rotates data of A n bits to
the right (LSB direction) and
stores the result in B. The
carry flag changes according
to the result.
Rotates data of A n bits to
the left (MSB direction) and
stores the result in B. The
carry flag changes according
to the result.
6.8
6.8
−[ RTL1 A ]−
079 1 bit rotate left
2
4
173
174
−[ A RTR n → B ]−
080 n bit rotate
right
10.2
10.2
−[ A RTL n → B ]−
081 n bit rotate left
4
175
Compare instructions
Speed
(µs)
FUN
Name
No.
096 Greater than
097 Greater than or
equal
Expression
Function
Steps
Page
178
−[ A > B ]−
−[ A >= B ]−
3
3
6.1
Turns ON output if A > B.
Turns ON output if A ≥ B.
5.3
179
−[ A = B ]−
−[ A <> B ]−
−[ A < B ]−
−[ A <= B ]−
098 Equal
099 Not equal
100 Less than
101 Less than or
equal
102 Double-word
greater than
3
3
3
5.0
5.0
6.1
180
181
182
Turns ON output if A = B.
Turns ON output if A ≠ B.
Turns ON output if A < B.
Turns ON output if A ≤ B.
3
3
5.3
6.1
183
184
−[ A+1⋅A D> B+1⋅B ]−
Turns ON output
if A+1⋅A > B+1⋅B.
Turns ON output
if A+1⋅A ≥ B+1⋅B.
−[ A+1⋅A D>= B+1⋅B ]−
103 Double-word
greater than or
equal
3
5.3
185
−[ A+1⋅A D= B+1⋅B ]−
−[ A+1⋅A D<> B+1⋅B ]−
−[ A+1⋅A D< B+1⋅B ]−
−[ A+1⋅A D<= B+1⋅B ]−
104 Double-word
equal
105 Double-word
not equal
106 Double-word
less than
107 Double-word
less than or
equal
Turns ON output
if A+1⋅A = B+1⋅B.
Turns ON output
if A+1⋅A ≠ B+1⋅B.
Turns ON output
if A+1⋅A < B+1⋅B.
Turns ON output
if A+1⋅A ≤ B+1⋅B.
3
3
3
5.0
5.0
6.1
186
187
188
3
5.3
189
110 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
Compare instructions (continued)
Speed
Page
(µs)
FUN
No.
108 Unsigned
greater than
Name
Expression
Function
Steps
3
−[ A U> B ]−
Turns ON output if A > B.
(Unsigned integer compare)
190
−[ A U>= B ]−
109 Unsigned
greater than or
equal
Turns ON output if A ≥ B.
(Unsigned integer compare)
3
191
−[ A U= B ]−
−[ A U<> B ]−
−[ A U< B ]−
−[ A U<= B ]−
110 Unsigned
equal
111 Unsigned
not equal
112 Unsigned
less than
113 Unsigned
less than or
equal
Turns ON output if A = B.
3
3
3
192
193
194
(Unsigned integer compare)
Turns ON output if A ≠ B.
(Unsigned integer compare)
Turns ON output if A < B.
(Unsigned integer compare)
Turns ON output if A ≤ B.
(Unsigned integer compare)
3
195
Special data processing
Speed
Page
(µs)
FUN
No.
Name
Expression
Function
Steps
2
−[ SET A ]−
114 Device/register
set
If A is a device:
Sets device A to ON.
If A is a register:
4.2
196
Stores HFFFF in registerA.
−[ RST A ]−
115 Device/register
reset
If A is a device:
Resets device A to OFF.
If A is a register:
2
4.2
197
Stores 0 in register A.
−[ SETC ]−
−[ RSTC ]−
−[ A ENC (n) B ]−
118 Set carry
119 Reset carry
120 Encode
Sets the carry flag to ON.
Resets the carry flag to OFF.
Finds the uppermost ON bit
position in the bit file of size 2n
bits starting with register A, and
stores it in B.
1
1
4.2
4.2
198
199
57.0 -
141.4
4
200
121 Decode
In the bit file of size 2n bits
starting with register B, sets ON
the bit position indicated by
lower n bits of A, and resets
OFF all other bits.
−[ A DEC (n) B ]−
69.5 -
99.1
4
3
2
201
202
215
−[ A BC B ]−
122 Bit count
147 Flip-flop
Counts the number of ON bits
of A and stores it in B.
Sets ON device A when set
input (S) is ON, and resets OFF
device A when reset input (R) is
ON.
S
R
F/F
A
Q
26.7
30.1
(Reset takes priority)
U
C
E
U/D
Q
149 Up-down
counter
While enable input (E) is ON,
counts up or down the number
of cycles the count input (C)
comes ON, depending on the
up/down select input (U).
Up when U is ON, down when U
is OFF.
A
2
216
Basic Hardware and Function 111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
Program control instructions
Speed
(µs)
21.0
(in a
pair)
FUN
No.
Name
Expression
Function
Steps
Page
203
−[ CALL N. n ]−
−−[ RET ]−
128 Subroutine call
129 Subroutine
return
2
1
Calls the subroutine number n.
Indicates the end of a
subroutine.
204
−[ FOR n ]−
−[ NEXT ]−
132 FOR
When the input of FOR is ON,
executes the segment from
FOR to NEXT the number of
times specified by n.
Indicates the start of the
subroutine number n.
Enables execution of interrupt
program.
Disables execution of interrupt
program.
Indicates the end of an interrupt
program.
2
1
2
1
1
1
2
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
22.0
(in a
pair)
133 NEXT
−[ SUBR (n) ]−−
−[ EI ]−
137 Subroutine
entry
140 Enable
interrupt
141 Disable
interrupt
142 Interrupt return
included
in CALL
27.6
(in a
pair)
−[ DI ]−
−−[ IRET ]−
−[ WDT n ]−
−[ STIZ (n) A ]−
1.4
143 Watchdog
timer reset
144 Step sequence
initialize
Extends the scan time over
detection time.
16.1
These
Resets OFF the n
devices stating with
A, and sets ON A.
Turns ON output if
input is ON and A is
ON.
59.9 -
65.0
configure
a series
of step
3
2
212
213
−[ STIN A ]−
145 Step sequence
input
sequence
27.0
−[ STOT A ]−
146 Step sequence
output
When input is ON,
resets OFF the
devices of STIN on
the same rung, and
sets ON A.
27.0 -
119.0
2
214
RAS
Speed
(µs)
FUN
Name
No.
154 Set calendar
Expression
Function
Steps
2
Page
217
−[ A CLND ]−
Sets 6 registers data starting
with A into clock/calendar.
Calculates difference between
present date & time and past
date & time stored in 6 registers
starting with A, and stores the
result in 6 registers starting with
B.
−[ A CLDS B ]−
155 Calendar
operation
3
218
112 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
Functions
Speed
Page
(µs)
FUN
No.
056 Moving
average
Name
Expression
Function
Steps
5
−[ A MAVE (n) B → C ]−
Calculates the average value
of latest n scan values of A,
and stores the result in C.
Filters the value of A by filter
constant specified by B, and
stores the result in C.
Performs PID control. (pre-
derivative real PID algorithm)
Process value (PV): A
159
−[ A DFL B → C ]−
061 Digital filter
4
4
160
−[ A PID3 B → C ]−
156 Pre-derivative
real PID
85.0 -
219
Set value (SV): A+1
428.0
PID parameters: B and after
Manipulation value (MV): C
Upper limits the value of A
by B, and stores the result in
C.
Lower limits the value of A
by B, and stores the result in
C.
Finds the maximum value of
n registers data starting with
A, and stores the value in C
and the pointer in C+1.
Finds the minimum value of
n registers data starting with
A, and stores the value in C
and the pointer in C+1.
Calculates the average value
of n registers data starting
with A, and stores the result
in C.
−[ A UL B → C ]−
−[ A LL B → C ]−
−[ A MAX (n) B ]−
160 Upper limit
161 Lower limit
4
4
224
225
162 Maximum
value
4
4
4
226
227
228
−[ A MIN (n) B ]−
163 Minimum value
164 Average value
−[ A AVE (n) B ]−
−[ A FG (n) B → C ]−
165 Function
generator
Finds f(x) for given x=A, and
stores it in C. The function
f(x) is defined by parameters
stored in a table 2×n
77.7 -
229
5
142.1
registers starting with B.
Basic Hardware and Function 113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
Conversion instructions
Speed
(µs)
FUN
No.
062 Hex to ASCII
conversion
Name
Expression
Function
Steps
4
Page
161
−[ A HTOA (n) B ]−
Converts the hexadecimal
data of n words stating with
A into ASCII characters, and
stores them in nx2 registers
starting with B.
−[ A ATOH (n) B ]−
063 ASCII to Hex
conversion
Converts the ASCII
characters stored in n
registers stating with A into
hexadecimal data, and stores
them in n/2 registers starting
with B.
4
162
−[ A ABS B ]−
180 Absolute value
Stores the absolute value of
A in B.
Stores the 2’s complement
value of A in B.
3
3
5.0
4.6
231
232
−[ A NEG B ]−
182 2’s
complement
−[ A+1⋅A DNEG B+1⋅B ]−
−[ A 7SEG B ]−
183 Double-word
2’s
complement
185 7-segment
decode
Stores the 2’s complement
value of A+1⋅A in B+1⋅B.
3
3
4.6
233
234
Converts lower 4 bits of A
into 7-segment code, and
stores it in B.
43.9
−[ A ASC B ]−
186 ASCII
conversion
Converts the alphanumerics
(max. 16 characters) of A
29.8 -
49.6
into ASCII codes, and stores 3 - 10
them in registers starting
with B.
236
−[ A BIN B ]−
188 Binary
conversion
Converts the BCD data in A
into binary data, and stores it
in B.
3
3
65.5
55.6
237
238
−[ A BCD B ]−
190 BCD
Converts the binary data in A
into BCD data, and stores it
in B.
conversion
114 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
Special I/O instructions
Speed
FUN
No.
235 Direct I/O
Name
Expression
Function
Steps
3
Available Page
(µs)
−[ I/O (n) A ]−
Performs the immediate
block I/O transfer of n
registers starting with A.
Writes data into the built-in
EEPROM, or reads data
from the EEPROM. The
transfer source and
destination are indirectly
designated by A and C. The
transfer register size is
designated by B.
20.7 +
21.3 × n
*1
257
√
−[ A XFER B → C ]−
236 Expanded data
transfer
54.0
1w
read
-
7130
16w
write
4
259
√
*1: Direct I/O instruction is effective only for the basic unit inputs/outputs.
*2: The expanded data transfer (XFER) instruction supports some special functions. It
also supports the communication function. The execution speed shown in the
above table is for the EEPROM read/write function. When the Inverter connection
mode is selected, the execution speed of this instruction is typically 150 µs (max.
500 µs).
NOTE
The index modification is available for some instructions. The values in the
execution speed column show the execution time without index
modification.
If index modification is used, approx. 20 µs is added per one indexed
operand.
Basic Hardware and Function 115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
7.2 Instruction specifications
The following pages in this section describe the detailed specifications of each
instruction. On each page, the following items are explained.
Expression
Shows the operands required for the instruction as italic characters.
Function
Explains the functions of the instruction with referring the operands shown on the
Expression box.
Execution condition
Shows the execution condition of the instruction and the instruction output status.
Operand
Shows available register, device or constant value for each operand. For constant
operand, available value range is described. If the constant column is just marked (√),
it means normal value range (-32768 to 32767 in 16-bit integer or -2147483648 to
2147483647 in 32-bit integer) is available.
Whether index modification for a register operand is usable or not is also shown for
each operand.
Example
Explains the operation of the instruction by using a typical example.
Note
Explains supplementary information, limitations, etc. for the instruction.
116 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
NO contact
Expression
A
Input
Output
Function
NO (normally open) contact of device A.
When the input is ON and the device A is ON, the output is turned ON.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF Regardless of the state of device A
ON
When device A is OFF
When device A is ON
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
K
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
A Device
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
Coil Y022 comes ON when the devices X000 and R001 are both ON.
X000
R001
Y022
Basic Hardware and Function 117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
NC contact
Expression
A
Input
Output
Function
NC (normally closed) contact of device A.
When the input is ON and the device A is OFF, the output is turned ON.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
OFF Regardless of the state of device A
ON
When device A is OFF
When device A is ON
OFF
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Device
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
Coil Y022 comes ON when the devices X000 and R001 are both OFF.
X000
R001
Y022
118 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
Transitional contact (Rising edge)
Expression
Input
Output
Function
When the input at last scan is OFF and the input at this scan is ON, the output is turned ON.
This instruction is used to detect the input changing from OFF to ON.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
OFF Regardless of the input state at last scan
ON
When the input state at last scan is OFF
When the input state at last scan is ON
OFF
Operand
No operand is required.
Example
Coil Y022 comes ON for only 1 scan when the device X000 comes ON.
X000
Y022
1 scan time
1 scan time
Note
• In case of T1, the maximum usable number in a program is 512. (
and
total)
• In case of T1S, the maximum usable number in a program is 2048.
(
P
N
(P)
(N)
total)
Basic Hardware and Function 119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
Transitional contact (Falling edge)
Expression
Input
Output
Function
When the input at last scan is ON and the input at this scan is OFF, the output is turned ON.
This instruction is used to detect the input changing from ON to OFF.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
OFF When the input state at last scan is OFF
When the input state at last scan is ON
ON
Regardless of the input state at last scan
OFF
Operand
No operand is required.
Example
Coil Y022 comes ON for only 1 scan when the device X000 comes OFF.
X000
Y022
1 scan time
1 scan time
Note
• In case of T1, the maximum usable number in a program is 512. (
and
total)
• In case of T1S, the maximum usable number in a program is 2048.
(
P
N
(P)
(N)
total)
120 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
( )
Coil
Expression
A
Input ( )
Function
Relay coil of device A.
When the input is ON, the device A is set to ON.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF Sets device A to OFF
−
−
ON
Sets device A to ON
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
K
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
A Device
√
√
√
Example
Coil Y025 comes ON when the devices X000 is ON.
X000
Y025
Basic Hardware and Function 121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
Forced coil
Expression
A
Input
Function
Regardless of the input sate the state of device A is retained.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF No operation
−
−
ON
No operation
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Device
√
√
√
Example
Device Y025 retains the preceding state regardless of the devices X000 state.
X000
Y025
Set force
Reset force
Set force
Reset force
Note
• The forced coil is a debugging function. The state of a forced coil device can be set ON or OFF
by the programming tool.
122 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
I
Inverter
Expression
Input
I
Output
Function
When the input is OFF, the output is turned ON, and when the input is ON, the output is turned
OFF.
This instruction inverts the link state.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
ON
OFF Inverts the input state
ON
Inverts the input state
OFF
Operand
No operand is required.
Example
Y022 comes ON when X000 is OFF, and Y022 comes OFF when X000 is ON.
X000
Y022
Basic Hardware and Function 123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
( I )
Invert coil
Expression
A
Input ( I )
Function
When the input is OFF, the device A is set to ON, and when the input is ON, the device A is set to
OFF. This instruction inverts the input state and store it in the deviceA.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF Sets device A to ON
−
−
ON
Sets device A to OFF
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Device
√
√
√
Example
Y025 comes ON when X000 is OFF, and Y025 comes OFF when X000 is ON.
X000
Y025
124 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
P
Positive pulse contact
Expression
A
Input
P
Output
Function
When the input is ON and the device A is changed from OFF to ON (OFF at last scan and ON at
this scan), the output is turned ON.
This instruction is used to detect the device changing from OFF to ON.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF Regardless of the state of device A
ON
State of device A is OFF
State of device A is ON
A is OFF at last scan
A is ON at last scan
OFF
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Device
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
R100 comes ON for only 1 scan when X000 is ON and X003 changes to ON.
X000
X003
R100
1 scan time 1 scan time
Note
• The maximum usable number in a program is 2048.
total)
(
P
N
(P)
(N)
Basic Hardware and Function 125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
N
Negative pulse contact
Expression
A
Input
N
Output
Function
When the input is ON and the device A is changed from ON to OFF (ON at last scan and OFF at
this scan), the output is turned ON.
This instruction is used to detect the device changing from ON to OFF.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF Regardless of the state of device A
ON
State of device A is OFF A is OFF at last scan
A is ON at last scan
State of device A is ON
OFF
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Device
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
R100 comes ON for only 1 scan when X000 is ON and X003 changes to OFF.
X000
X003
R100
1 scan time 1 scan time
Note
• The maximum usable number in a program is 2048.
total)
(
P
N
(P)
(N)
126 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
Positive pulse coil
( P )
Expression
A
Input ( P )
Function
When the input is changed form OFF to ON, the device A is set to ON for 1 scan time.
This instruction is used to detect the input changing from OFF to ON.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF Sets device A to OFF
−
−
−
ON
When the input at last scan is OFF, sets A to ON
When the input at last scan is ON, sets A to OFF
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Device
√
√
√
Example
R101 comes ON for only 1 scan when X000 is changed from OFF to ON.
X000
R100
1 scan time
1 scan time
Note
• The maximum usable number in a program is 2048.
total)
(
P
N
(P)
(N)
Basic Hardware and Function 127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
Negative pulse coil
( N )
Expression
A
Input ( N )
Function
When the input is changed form ON to OFF, the device A is set to ON for 1 scan time.
This instruction is used to detect the input changing from ON to OFF.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF When the input at last scan is OFF, sets A to OFF
−
−
−
When the input at last scan is ON, sets A to ON
ON
Sets device A to OFF
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Device
√
√
√
Example
R101 comes ON for only 1 scan when X000 is changed from ON to OFF.
X000
R100
1 scan time 1 scan time
Note
• The maximum usable number in a program is 2048.
total)
(
P
N
(P)
(N)
128 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
TON
ON delay timer
Expression
Input
[ A TON B ]
Output
Function
When the input is changed from OFF to ON, timer updating for the timer register B is started. The
elapsed time is stored in B. When the specified time by A has elapsed after the input came ON, the
output and the timer device corresponding to B is turned ON. (Timer updating is stopped)
When the input is changed from ON to OFF, B is cleared to 0, and the output and the timer device
are turned OFF.
The available data range for operand A is 0 to 32767.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF No operation (timer is not updating)
ON
Elapsed time < preset time (timer is updating)
Elapsed time ≥ preset time (timer is not updating)
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
0 - 32767
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
√
I
√
J
√
K
√
A Preset time
B Elapsed time
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
Y021 (and the timer device T.000) is turned ON 2 seconds after X000 came ON.
X000
Note
Preset value
• Time is set in 10 ms units for;
T1: T000 to T031 (0 to 327.67 s)
T1S: T000 to T063 (0 to 327.67 s)
• Time is set in 100 ms units for;
T1: T032 to T063 (0 to 3276.7 s)
T1S: T064 to T255 (0 to 3276.7 s)
• Multiple timer instructions (TON, TOF or
SS) with the same timer register are not
allowed.
T000
T.000
Y021
Preset time (2s) Less than preset time
Basic Hardware and Function 129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
TOF
OFF delay timer
Expression
Input
[ A TOF B ]
Output
Function
When the input is changed from OFF to ON, the output and the timer device corresponding to the
timer register B are set to ON. When the input is changed from ON to OFF, timer updating for B is
started. The elapsed time is stored in B. When the specified time by A has elapsed after the input
came OFF, the output and the timer device are turned OFF. (Timer updating is stopped)
The available data range for operand A is 0 to 32767.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Elapsed time < preset time (timer is updating)
Elapsed time ≥ preset time (timer is not updating)
No operation (timer is not updating)
ON
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
0 - 32767
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
√
I
√
J
√
K
√
A Preset time
B Elapsed time
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
Y021 (and the timer device T.002) is turned OFF 1 second after X000 came OFF.
X000
Note
• Time is set in 10 ms units for;
T1: T000 to T031 (0 to 327.67 s)
T1S: T000 to T063 (0 to 327.67 s)
• Time is set in 100 ms units for;
T1: T032 to T063 (0 to 3276.7 s)
T1S: T064 to T255 (0 to 3276.7 s)
• Multiple timer instructions (TON, TOF or
SS) with the same timer register are not
allowed.
Preset value
T002
T.002
Y021
Preset time (1 s) Less than preset time
130 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
SS
Single shot timer
Expression
Input
[ A SS B ]
Output
Function
When the input is changed from OFF to ON, the output and the timer device corresponding to the
timer register B are set to ON, and timer updating for B is started. The elapsed time is stored in B.
When the specified time by A has elapsed after the input came ON, the output and the timer device
are turned OFF. (Timer updating is stopped)
The available data range for operand A is 0 to 32767.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Elapsed time < preset time (timer is updating)
Elapsed time ≥ preset time (timer is not updating)
Elapsed time < preset time (timer is updating)
Elapsed time ≥ preset time (timer is not updating)
ON
OFF
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
0 - 32767
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
√
I
√
J
√
K
√
A Preset time
B Elapsed time
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
Y021 (and the timer device T.003) is turned OFF 1 second after X000 came ON.
X000
Note
• Time is set in 10 ms units for;
T1: T000 to T031 (0 to 327.67 s)
T1S: T000 to T063 (0 to 327.67 s)
• Time is set in 100 ms units for;
T1: T032 to T063 (0 to 3276.7 s)
T1S: T064 to T255 (0 to 3276.7 s)
• Multiple timer instructions (TON, TOF or
SS) with the same timer register are not
allowed.
Preset value
T003
T.003
Y021
Preset time (1 s)
Preset time (1 s)
Basic Hardware and Function 131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
CNT
Counter
Expression
Count input
C CNT Q Output
Enable input
E A B
Function
While the enable input is ON, this instruction counts the number of the count input changes from
OFF to ON. The count value is stored in the counter register B. When the count value reaches the
set value A, the output and the counter device corresponding toB are turned ON. When the enable
input comes OFF, B is cleared to 0 and the output and the counter device are turned OFF.
The available data range for operand A is 0 to 65535.
Execution condition
Enable
input
Operation
Output
OFF No operation (B is cleared to 0)
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
Count value (B) < set value (A)
Count value (B) ≥ set value (A)
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
0 - 65535
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
√
I
√
J
√
K
√
A Set value
B Count value
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
Note
• No transitional contact is required for the
count input. The count input rising edge is
detected by this instruction.
• For the count input, direct linking to a
connecting point is not allowed. In this
case, insert a dummy contact (always ON
= S04F, etc.) just before the input.
X001
X002
C010
C.010
Y021
5
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
Refer to Note of Shift register FUN 074.
• Multiple counter instructions (CNT) with
132 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
MCS Master control set / reset
MCR
Expression
Input
[ MCS ]
[ MCR ]
Function
When the MCS input is ON, ordinary operation is performed. When the MCS input is OFF, the state
of left power rail between MCS and MCR is turned OFF.
Execution condition
MCS
input
Operation
Output
OFF Sets OFF the left power rail until MCR
ON Ordinary operation
−
−
Operand
No operand is required.
Example
When X000 is OFF, Y021 and Y022 are turned OFF regardless of the states of X001 and
X002.
Equivalent circuit
X000
Note
• MCS and MCR must be used as a pair.
• Nesting is not allowed.
X001
X002
Y021
Y022
Basic Hardware and Function 133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
JCS
JCR
Jump control set / reset
Expression
Input
[ JCS ]
[ JCR ]
Function
When the JCS input is ON, instructions between JCS and JCR are skipped (not executed). When
the JCS input is OFF, ordinary operation is performed.
Execution condition
JCS
Operation
Output
input
OFF Ordinary operation
ON
Skips until JCR
Operand
No operand is required.
Example
When X000 is ON, the rung 2 circuit is skipped, therefore Y021 is not changed its state
regardless of the X001 state. When X000 is OFF, Y021 is controlled by the X001 state.
Note
• JCS and JCR must be used as a pair.
• Nesting is not allowed.
134 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
END
End
Expression
[ END ]
Function
Indicates the end of main program or sub-program. Instructions after the END instruction are not
executed. At least one END instruction is necessary in a program.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
Operand
No operand is required.
Example
Note
• For debugging purpose, 2 or more END instructions can be written in a program.
• Instructions after END instruction are not executed. Those steps are, however, counted as used
steps.
Basic Hardware and Function 135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 018
MOV
Data transfer
Expression
Input −[ A MOV B ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, the data of A is stored in B.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
OFF No execution
ON
Execution
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Source
B Destination
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example 1 (constant to register)
When R010 is ON, a constant data (12345) is stored in D0100 and the output is turned ON.
Example 2 (register to register)
When X005 is ON, the data of SW30 is stored in RW45 and the output is turned ON. If SW30
is 500, the data 500 is stored in RW45.
Example 3 (index modification)
When R050 is changed from OFF to ON, the data of RW08 is stored in the index register I and
the data of D(0000+I) is stored in YW10. If RW08 is 300, the data of D0300 is stored in YW10.
136 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 019
DMOV Double-word data transfer
Expression
Input −[ A+1⋅A MOV B+1⋅B ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, the double-word (32-bit) data of A+1⋅A is stored in double-word register
B+1⋅B. The data range is -2147483648 to 2147483647.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
OFF No execution
ON
Execution
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Source
B Destination
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
When R011 is ON, a double-word data of D0101⋅D0100 is stored in RW17⋅RW16 and the
output is turned ON. If D0101⋅D0100 is 1234567, the data 1234567 is stored in RW17⋅RW16.
Basic Hardware and Function 137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 020
NOT
Invert transfer
Expression
Input −[ A NOT B ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, the bit-inverted data of A is stored in B.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
OFF No execution
ON
Execution
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Source
B Destination
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
When R010 is ON, the bit-inverted data of RW30 is stored in D0200 and the output is turned
ON. If RW30 is H4321, the bit-inverted data (HBCDE) is stored in D0200.
F
E
D
C
B
A
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RW30 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1
4
3
2
1
Bit-invert
F
E
D
C
B
A
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
D0200 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0
B
C
D
E
138 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 022
XCHG Data exchange
Expression
Input −[ A XCHG B ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B is exchanged.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
OFF No execution
ON
Execution
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
K
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
A Operation data
B Operation data
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
When R005 is ON, the data of RW23 and D0100 is exchanged. If the original data of RW23 is
23456 and that of D0100 is 291, the operation result is as follows.
RW23 23456
D0100 291
Before operation
RW23
D0100
291
23456
After operation
Basic Hardware and Function 139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 024
TINZ
Table initialize
Expression
Input −[ A TINZ (n) B ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, the data of A is stored in n registers starting with B.
The allowable range of the table sizen is 1 to 1024 words.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Device
Output
OFF
ON
OFF No execution
ON
Execution
Operand
Name
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Source
n Table size
B Start of
destination
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
1 - 1024
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
When R010 is ON, a constant data (0) is stored in 100 registers starting with D0200 (D0200 to
D0299) and the output is turned ON.
Constant
0
D0200
D0201
D0202
0
0
0
100 registers
D0299
0
140 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 025
TMOV Table transfer
Expression
Input −[ A TMOV (n) B ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, the data of n registers starting with A are transferred to n registers starting
with B in a block. The allowable range of the table size n is 1 to 1024 words.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
OFF No execution
ON
Execution
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
1 - 1024
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
√
I
J
K
A Start of source
n Table size
B Start of
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
destination
Example
When R010 is ON, the data of D0500 to D0509 (10 registers) are block transferred to D1000 to
D1009, and the output is turned ON.
D0500
D0501
D0502
1111
2222
3333
D1000
D1001
D1002
1111
2222
3333
Block transfer
10 registers
D0509
12345
D1009
12345
Note
• The source and destination tables can be overlapped.
Basic Hardware and Function 141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 026
TNOT
Table invert transfer
Expression
Input −[ A TNOT (n) B ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, the data of n registers starting with A are bit-inverted and transferred to n
registers starting with B in a block. The allowable range of the table size n is 1 to 1024 words.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
OFF No execution
ON
Execution
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
1 - 1024
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
√
I
J
K
A Start of source
n Table size
B Start of
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
destination
Example
When R010 is ON, the data of D0600 to D0604 (5 registers) are bit-inverted and transferred to
D0865 to D0869, and the output is turned ON.
D0600
D0601
D0602
D0603
D0604
H00FF
H0000
H1234
H5555
H89AB
D0865
D0866
D0867
D0868
D0869
HFF00
HFFFF
HEDCB
HAAAA
H7654
Bit-invert
and transfer
5 registers
Note
• The source and destination tables can be overlapped.
142 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 027
+
Addition
Expression
Input −[ A + B → C ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B are added, and the result is stored in C.
If the result is greater than 32767, the upper limit value 32767 is stored in C, and the output is
turned ON. If the result is smaller than -32768, the lower limit value -32768 is stored in C, and the
output is turned ON.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF No execution
ON
Execution (normal)
Execution (overflow or underflow occurred)
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Augend
B Addend
C Sum
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
When R005 is ON, the data of D0100 and the constant data 1000 is added, and the result is
stored in D0110.
If the data of D0100 is 12345, the result 13345 is stored in D0110, and R010 is turned OFF.
D0100
12345
+
D0110
13345
R010 is OFF
Constant 1000
If the data of D0100 is 32700, the result exceeds the limit value, therefore 32767 is stored in
D0110, and R010 is turned ON.
D0100
32700
Overflow
+
D0110
32767
R010 is ON
Constant 1000
Basic Hardware and Function 143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 028
Subtraction
−
Expression
Input −[ A − B → C ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, the data of B is subtracted from the data of A, and the result is stored in C.
If the result is greater than 32767, the upper limit value 32767 is stored in C, and the output is
turned ON. If the result is smaller than -32768, the lower limit value -32768 is stored in C, and the
output is turned ON.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF No execution
ON
Execution (normal)
Execution (overflow or underflow occurred)
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Minuend
B Subtrahend
C Difference
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
When R005 is ON, the constant data 2500 is subtracted from the data of D0200, and the result
is stored in RW50.
If the data of D0200 is 15000, the result 12500 is stored in RW50, and R010 is turned OFF.
D0200
15000
−
RW50
12500
R010 is OFF
Constant 2500
If the data of D0200 is -31000, the result is smaller than the limit value, therefore -32768 is
stored in RW50, and R010 is turned ON.
D0100
-31000
Underflow
−
RW50
-32768
R010 is ON
Constant 2500
144 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 029
Multiplication
∗
Expression
Input −[ A ∗ B → C+1⋅C ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, the data of A is multiplied by the data of B, and the result is stored in
double-length register C+1⋅C.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
OFF No execution
ON
Execution
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Multiplicand
B Multiplier
C Product
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
When R005 is ON, the data of D0050 is multiplied by the data of RW05, and the result is
stored in double-length register D0101⋅D0100 (upper 16-bit in D0101 and lower 16-bit in
D0100).
If the data of D0050 is 1500 and the data of RW05 is 20, the result 30000 is stored in
D0101⋅D0100.
D0050
RW05
1500
20
×
D0101⋅D0100
30000
D0101
D0100
H0000
H7530
(upper 16-bit)
(lower 16-bit)
Basic Hardware and Function 145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 030
/
Division
Expression
Input −[ A / B → C ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, the data of A is divided by the data of B, and the quotient is stored in C and
the remainder in C+1.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
ERF
−
−
Set
OFF No execution
ON
Normal execution (B ≠ 0)
No execution (B = 0)
OFF
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Dividend
B Divisor
C Quotient
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
When R005 is ON, the data of RW22 is divided by the constant data 325, and the quotient is
stored in RW27 and the remainder is stored in RW28.
If the data of RW22 is 2894, the quotient 8 is stored in RW27 and the remainder 294 is stored
in RW28.
RW22
2894
325
÷
RW27
RW28
8
294
(quotient)
(remainder)
Constant
Note
• If divisor (operand B) is 0, ERF (instruction error flag = S051) is set to ON.
The ERF (S051) can be reset to OFF by user program, e.g. [ RST S051 ] .
• If the index register K is used as operand C, the remainder is ignored.
• If operand A is -32768 and operand B is -1, the data -32768 is stored in C and 0 is stored in
C+1.
146 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 031
D+
Double-word addition
Expression
Input −[ A+1⋅A D+ B+1⋅B → C+1⋅C ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, the double-word data of A+1⋅A and B+1⋅B are added, and the result is
stored in C+1⋅C. The data range is -2147483648 to 2147483647.
If the result is greater than 2147483647, the upper limit value 2147483647 is stored in C+1⋅C, and
the output is turned ON. If the result is smaller than -2147483648, the lower limit value
-2147483648 is stored in C+1⋅C, and the output is turned ON.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF No execution
ON
Execution (normal)
Execution (overflow or underflow occurred)
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Augend
B Addend
C Sum
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
When R005 is ON, the data of D0011⋅D0010 and the constant data 100000 is added, and the
result is stored in D0101⋅D0100.
If the data of D0011⋅D0010 is 300000, the result 400000 is stored in D0101⋅D0100, and R010
is turned OFF. (No overflow/underflow)
D0011⋅D0010
300000
100000
+
D0101⋅D0100
400000
R010 is OFF
Constant
Basic Hardware and Function 147
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 032
Double-word subtraction
D−
Expression
Input −[ A+1⋅A D− B+1⋅B → C+1⋅C ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, the double-word data of B+1⋅B is subtracted from A+1⋅A, and the result is
stored in C+1⋅C. The data range is -2147483648 to 2147483647.
If the result is greater than 2147483647, the upper limit value 2147483647 is stored in C+1⋅C, and
the output is turned ON. If the result is smaller than -2147483648, the lower limit value
-2147483648 is stored in C+1⋅C, and the output is turned ON.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF No execution
ON
Execution (normal)
Execution (overflow or underflow occurred)
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Minuend
B Subtrahend
C Difference
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
When R005 is ON, the double-word data of RW25⋅RW24 is subtracted from the double-word
data of D0101⋅D0100, and the result is stored in D0103⋅D0102.
If the data of D0101⋅D0100 is 1580000 and the data of RW25⋅RW24 is 80000, the result
1500000 is stored in D0103⋅D0102, and R010 is turned OFF. (No overflow/underflow)
D0101⋅D0100
1580000
80000
−
D0103⋅D0102
1500000
R010 is OFF
RW25⋅RW24
148 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 035
+C
Addition with carry
Expression
Input −[ A +C B → C ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, the data of A, B and the carry flag (CF = S050) are added, and the result is
stored in C. If carry is occurred in the operation, the carry flag is set to ON. If the result is greater
than 32767 or smaller than -32768, the output is turned ON.
This instruction is used to perform unsigned addition or double-length addition.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
CF
−
Reset
Set
Reset
Set
OFF No execution
ON
Execution Normal
No carry
Carry occurred
Overflow / No carry
underflow Carry occurred
ON
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Augend
B Addend
C Sum
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
When R013 is ON, the data of double-length registers D0101⋅D0100 and RW21⋅RW20 are
added, and the result is stored in D0201⋅D0200. The RSTC is a instruction to reset the carry
flag before starting the calculation.
If the data of D0101⋅D0100 is 12345678 and RW21⋅RW20 is 54322, the result 12400000 is
stored in D0201⋅D0200.
D0101⋅D0100 12345678
+
D0201⋅D0200 12400000
RW21⋅RW20
54322
Basic Hardware and Function 149
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 036
-C
Subtraction with carry
Expression
Input −[ A -C B → C ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, the data of B and the carry flag (CF = S050) are subtracted from A, and the
result is stored in C. If borrow is occurred in the operation, the carry flag is set to ON. If the result is
greater than 32767 or smaller than -32768, the output is turned ON.
This instruction is used to perform unsigned subtraction or double-length subtraction.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
CF
−
Reset
Set
Reset
Set
OFF No execution
ON
Execution Normal
No borrow
Borrow occurred
Overflow / No borrow
underflow Borrow occurred
ON
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Minuend
B Subtrahend
C Difference
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
When R013 is ON, the data of double-length register RW23⋅RW22 is subtracted from the data
of D0201⋅D0200, and the result is stored in D0211⋅D0210. The RSTC is a instruction to reset
the carry flag before starting the calculation.
If the data of D0201⋅D0200 is 12345678 and RW23⋅RW22 is 12340000, the result 5678 is
stored in D0211⋅D0210.
D0201⋅D0200 12345678
-
D0211⋅D0210
5678
RW23⋅RW22 12340000
150 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 039
Unsigned multiplication
U∗
Expression
Input −[ A U∗ B → C+1⋅C ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, the unsigned data of A and B are multiplied, and the result is stored in
double-length register C+1⋅C. The data range of A and B is 0 to 65535 (unsigned 16-bit data)
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
OFF No execution
ON
Execution
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Multiplicand
B Multiplier
C Product
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
When R010 is ON, the data of D0050 is multiplied by the data of RW05, and the result is
stored in double-length register D0101⋅D0100 (upper 16-bit in D0101 and lower 16-bit in
D0100).
If the data of D0050 is 52500 and the data of RW05 is 30, the result 1575000 is stored in
D0101⋅D0100.
D0050
RW05
52500
30
×
D0101⋅D0100
1575000
Note
• This instruction handles the register data as unsigned integer.
Basic Hardware and Function 151
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 040
U/
Unsigned division
Expression
Input −[ A U/ B → C ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, the unsigned data of A is divided by the unsigned data of B, and the
quotient is stored in C and the remainder in C+1.
The data range of A and B is 0 to 65535 (unsigned 16-bit data)
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
ERF
−
−
Set
OFF No execution
ON
Normal execution (B ≠ 0)
No execution (B = 0)
OFF
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Dividend
B Divisor
C Quotient
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
When R010 is ON, the data of D0030 is divided by the constant data 300, and the quotient is
stored in D0050 and the remainder is stored in D0051.
If the data of D0030 is 54321, the quotient 181 is stored in D0050 and the remainder 21 is
stored in D0051.
D0030
54321
300
÷
RW27
RW28
181
21
(quotient)
(remainder)
Constant
Note
• If divisor (operand B) is 0, ERF (instruction error flag = S051) is set to ON.
The ERF (S051) can be reset to OFF by user program, e.g. −[ RST S051 ]−.
• If the index register K is used as operand C, the remainder is ignored.
• This instruction handles the register data as unsigned integer.
152 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 041
DIV
Unsigned double/single division
Expression
Input −[ A+1⋅A DIV B → C ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, the double-word data of A+1⋅A is divided by the data of B, and the quotient
is stored in C and the remainder in C+1. The data range of A+1⋅A is 0 to 4294967295, and the data
range of B and C is 0 to 65535.
If the quotient is greater than 65535 (overflow), the limit value 65535 is stored in C, 0 is stored in
C+1, and the instruction error flag (ERF = S051) is set to ON.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ERF
−
−
Set
OFF No execution
ON
Normal execution (B ≠ 0)
Overflow (B ≠ 0)
No execution (B = 0)
Set
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Dividend
B Divisor
C Quotient
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
When R010 is ON, the double-word data of D0201⋅D0200 is divided by the constant data
4000, and the quotient is stored in D1000 and the remainder is stored in D1001.
If the data of D0201⋅D0200 is 332257, the quotient 83 is stored in D1000 and the remainder
257 is stored in D1001.
D0201⋅D0200
332257
4000
÷
D1000
D1001
83 (quotient)
257 (remainder)
Constant
Note
• If divisor (operand B) is 0, ERF (instruction error flag = S051) is set to ON.
The ERF (S051) can be reset to OFF by user program, e.g. −[ RST S051 ]−.
• This instruction handles the register data as unsigned integer.
Basic Hardware and Function 153
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 043
+1
Increment
Expression
Input −[ +1 A ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, the data of A is increased by 1 and stored in A.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
OFF No execution
ON
Execution
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Operation data
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
At the rising edge of X004 changes from OFF to ON, the data of D0050 is increased by 1 and
stored in D0050.
If the data of D0050 is 750 before the execution, it will be 751 after the execution.
D0050
750
D0050
751
+ 1
Note
• There is no limit value for this instruction. When the data of operand A is 32767 before the
execution, it will be -32768 after the execution.
154 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 045
-1
Decrement
Expression
Input −[ -1 A ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, the data of A is decreased by 1 and stored in A.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
OFF No execution
ON
Execution
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
K
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
A Operation data
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
At the rising edge of X005 changes from OFF to ON, the data of D0050 is decreased by 1 and
stored in D0050.
If the data of D0050 is 1022 before the execution, it will be 1021 after the execution.
D0050
1022
D0050
1021
- 1
Note
• There is no limit value for this instruction. When the data of operand A is -32768 before the
execution, it will be 32767 after the execution.
Basic Hardware and Function 155
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 048
AND
AND
Expression
Input −[ A AND B → C ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, this instruction finds logical AND of A and B, and stores the result in C.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
OFF No execution
ON
Execution
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Source
B Source
C AND
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
When R012 is ON, logical AND operation is executed for the data of RW12 and the constant
data HFF00, and the result is stored in D0030.
If the data of RW12 is H3456, the result H3400 is stored in D0030.
F
E
D
C
B
A
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RW12
0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0
3
4
5
6
AND
Constant 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
F
F
0
0
D0030
0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3
4
0
0
156 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 050
OR
OR
Expression
Input −[ A OR B → C ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, this instruction finds logical OR of A and B, and stores the result in C.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
OFF No execution
ON
Execution
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Source
B source
C OR
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
When R012 is ON, logical OR operation is executed for the data of RW13 and RW20, and the
result is stored in D0031.
If the data of RW13 is H5678 and RW20 is H4321, the result H5779 is stored in D0031.
F
E
D
C
B
A
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RW13
RW20
D0031
0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0
5
6
7
8
OR
0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1
4
3
2
1
0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1
5
7
7
9
Basic Hardware and Function 157
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 052
EOR
Exclusive OR
Expression
Input −[ A EOR B → C ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, this instruction finds exclusive OR oAf and B, and stores the result in C.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
OFF No execution
ON
Execution
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Source
B source
C Exclusive OR
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
When R012 is ON, exclusive OR operation is executed for the data of D1000 and D0300, and
the result is stored in D1000.
If the data of D1000 is H5678 and D0300 is H4321, the result H1559 is stored in D1000.
F
E
D
C
B
A
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
D1000
D0300
D1000
0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0
5
6
7
8
Exclusive OR
0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1
4
3
2
1
0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1
1
5
5
9
158 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 056
MAVE
Moving average
Expression
Input −[ A MAVE (n) B → C ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, this instruction calculates the average value of the latestn scan’s register A
data, and stores it in C. The allowable range ofn is 1 to 64.
This instruction is useful for filtering the analog input signal.
The latest n scan’s data of A are stored in n registers starting with B, and C+1 are used as pointer.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
OFF No execution
ON
Execution
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Input data
n Data size
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
1 - 64
B Start of table
C Output data
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
The latest 5 scan’s data of XW04 is stored in D0900 to D0904 (5 registers), and the average
value of them is calculated and stored in D0010.
D0011 is used as internal work data.
XW04
1000
D0010
200 = (1000) / 5
1st scan
2nd scan
3rd scan
4th scan
5th scan
6th scan
7th scan
8th scan
1005
1009
1012
1007
1004
998
401 = (1000 + 1005) / 5
603 = (1000 + 1005 + 1009) / 5
805 = (1000 + 1005 + 1009 + 1012) / 5
1006 = (1000 + 1005 + 1009 + 1012 + 1007) / 5
1007 = (1005 + 1009 + 1012 + 1007 + 1004) / 5
1006 = (1009 + 1012 + 1007 + 1004 + 998) / 5
1003 = (1012 + 1007 + 1004 + 998 + 994) / 5
994
Basic Hardware and Function 159
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 061
DFL
Digital Filter
Expression
Input −[ A DFL B → C ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, this instruction calculates the following formula to perform digital filtering for
input data A by filter constant by B, and stores the result in C.
yn = 1−FL ×xn +FL ×yn − 1
(
)
Here; xn is input data specified by A
FL is filter constant, 1/10000 of data specified by B (data range: 0 to 9999)
yn is output data to be stored in C
yn-1 is output data at last scan
This instruction is useful for filtering the analog input signal.C+1 is used for internal work data.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
OFF No execution
ON
Execution (FL is limited within the range of 0 to
9999)
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Input data
B Filter constant
C Output data
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
The filtered data of XW04 is stored in D0110. (D0111 is used for internal work data)
When D0100 value is small
XW04
When D0100 value is large
XW04
D0110
D0110
Time
Time
160 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 062
HTOA
Hex to ASCII conversion
Expression
Input −[ A HTOA (n) B ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, the hexadecimal data of n registers starting with A is converted into ASCII
characters and stored in B and after. The uppermost digit of source A is stored in lower byte of
destination B, and followed in this order. The allowable range ofn is 1 to 32.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
OFF No execution
ON
Execution
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Source
n Data size
B Destination
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
1 - 32
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
When R010 is ON, 4 words data of D0100 to D0103 are converted into ASCII characters, and
stored in 8 words registers starting with D0200.
F
0
F
8
7
0
D0100
D0101
D0102
D0103
H0123
H4567
H89AB
HCDEF
D0220
D0221
D0222
D0223
D0224
D0225
D0226
D0227
“1” (H31)
“3” (H33)
“5” (H35)
“7” (H37)
“9” (H39)
“B” (H42)
“D” (H44)
“F” (H46)
“0” (H30)
“2” (H32)
“4” (H34)
“6” (H36)
“8” (H38)
“A” (H41)
“C” (H43)
“E” (H45)
Converted
Note
• If index register (I, J or K) is used for the operand A, only n = 1 is allowed. Otherwise,
boundary error will occur.
Basic Hardware and Function 161
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 063
ATOH
ASCII to Hex conversion
Expression
Input −[ A ATOH (n) B ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, the ASCII characters stored in n registers starting with A is converted into
hexadecimal data and stored in B and after. The lower byte of source A is stored as uppermost
digit of destination B, and followed in this order. The allowable ASCII character in the source table
is “0” (H30) to “9” (H39) and “A” (H41) to “F” (H46). The allowable range ofn is 1 to 64.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
ERF
−
−
Set
OFF No execution
ON
Normal execution
Conversion data error (no execution)
OFF
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Source
n Data size
B Destination
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
1 - 64
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
When R011 is ON, the ASCII characters stored in 8 words of D0300 to D0307 are converted
into hexadecimal data, and stored in 4 words registers starting with RW040.
F
8
7
0
F
0
D0300
D0301
D0302
D0303
D0304
D0305
D0306
D0307
“1” (H31)
“3” (H33)
“5” (H35)
“7” (H37)
“9” (H39)
“B” (H42)
“D” (H44)
“F” (H46)
“0” (H30)
“2” (H32)
“4” (H34)
“6” (H36)
“8” (H38)
“A” (H41)
“C” (H43)
“E” (H45)
RW040
RW041
RW042
RW043
H0123
H4567
H89AB
HCDEF
Converted
Note
• If index register (I, J or K) is used for the operand A, only n = 1 is allowed.
• If n is odd number, lower 2 digits of the last converted data will not be fixed, Use even for n.
162 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 064
TEST
Bit test
Expression
Input −[ A TEST B ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, this instruction finds logical AND of A and B. Then if the result is not 0, sets
the output to ON.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
OFF No execution
ON
Execution When the result is not 0
When the result is 0
OFF
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Source
B Test data
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
Logical AND operation is executed for the data of RW07 and the constant data H0FFF, and if
the result is not 0, R00A is turned ON. (R00A is turned ON when any device from R070 to
R07B is ON.)
If the data of RW07 is H4008, R00A is turned ON.
F
E
D
C
B
A
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RW07
0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
4
0
0
8
AND
Constant 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
0
F
F
F
Result is not 0
Result
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
R00A comes ON
Basic Hardware and Function 163
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 068
SHR1
1 bit shift right
Expression
Input −[ SHR1 A ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, the data of register A is shifted 1 bit to the right (LSB direction). 0 is stored in
the left most bit (MSB). The pushed out bit state is stored in the carry flag (CF = S050). After the
operation, if the right most bit (LSB) is ON, the output is turned ON.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
CF
−
Set or reset
Set or reset
OFF No execution
ON
Execution When LSB = 1
When LSB = 0
OFF
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Operation data
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
When X007 is changed from OFF to ON, the data of RW15 is shifted 1 bit to the right.
The figure below shows an operation example.
(MSB)
F
(LSB)
E
D
C
B
A
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RW15
0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0
CF
0
RW15
0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1
(Result)
0
R001 is turned ON
164 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 069
SHL1
1 bit shift left
Expression
Input −[ SHL1 A ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, the data of register A is shifted 1 bit to the left (MSB direction). 0 is stored in
the right most bit (LSB). The pushed out bit state is stored in the carry flag (CF = S050). After the
operation, if the left most bit (MSB) is ON, the output is turned ON.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
CF
−
Set or reset
Set or reset
OFF No execution
ON
Execution When MSB = 1
When MSB = 0
OFF
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Operation data
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
When X008 is changed from OFF to ON, the data of RW15 is shifted 1 bit to the left.
The figure below shows an operation example.
(MSB)
F
(LSB)
0
E
D
C
B
A
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0
RW15
CF
1
RW15 (Result)
1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0
R002 is turned ON
0
Basic Hardware and Function 165
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 070
SHR
n bit shift right
Expression
Input −[ A SHR n → B ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, the data of register A is shifted n bits to the right (LSB direction) including
the carry flag (CF = S050), and stored in B. 0 is stored in upper n bits. After the operation, if the
right most bit (LSB) is ON, the output is turned ON.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
CF
−
Set or reset
Set or reset
OFF No execution
ON
Execution When LSB = 1
When LSB = 0
OFF
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Source
n Shift bits
B Destination
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
1 - 16
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
When X007 is changed from OFF to ON, the data of RW18 is shifted 5 bits to the right and the
result is stored in RW20.
The figure below shows an operation example.
(MSB)
F
(LSB)
E
D
C
B
A
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RW18
0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0
CF
1
RW20
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0
(Result)
0
R001 is turned OFF
166 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 071
SHL
n bit shift left
Expression
Input −[ A SHL n → B ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, the data of register A is shifted n bits to the left (MSB direction) including the
carry flag (CF = S050), and stored in B. 0 is stored in lower n bits. After the operation, if the left
most bit (MSB) is ON, the output is turned ON.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
CF
−
Set or reset
Set or reset
OFF No execution
ON
Execution When MSB = 1
When MSB = 0
OFF
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Source
n Shift bits
B Destination
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
1 - 16
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
When X008 is changed from OFF to ON, the data of RW18 is shifted 3 bits to the left and the
result is stored in RW20.
The figure below shows an operation example.
(MSB)
F
(LSB)
0
E
D
C
B
A
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0
RW18
CF
1
RW20 (Result)
0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0
R002 is turned OFF
0
Basic Hardware and Function 167
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 074
SR
Shift register
Expression
Data input
Shift input
Enable input − E
− D SR Q − Output
− S (n)
A
Function
While the enable input is ON, this instruction shifts the data of the bit table, size n starting with A,
1 bit to the left (upper address direction) when the shift input is ON. The state of the data input is
stored in A. The pushed out bit state is stored in the carry flag (CF = S050).
When the enable input is OFF, all bits in the table and the carry flag are reset to OFF.
Execution condition
Enable
input
Operation
Output
OFF
CF
OFF Resets all bits in the bit table
Reset
ON
When the shift input is ON
When the shift input is OFF
Shift execution
No execution
Last bit Set or reset
state
−
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
1 - 64
X
Y
√
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Leading device
n Device size
√
√
Example
32 devices starting with R100 (R100 to R11F) is specified as a shift register.
When R010 is OFF, the data of the shift register is reset to 0. (R100 to R11F are reset to OFF)
The carry flag (CF = S050) is also reset to OFF.
While R010 is ON, the data of the shift register is shifted 1 bit to the upper address direction
when X009 is changed from OFF to ON. At the same time, the state of X008 is stored in the
leading bit (R100).
The output (R011) indicates the state of the last bit (R11F).
168 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
The figure below shows an operation example. (When X009 is changed from OFF to ON)
CF
R11F R11E R11D R11C
R103 R102 R101 R100
X008
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
Shift result
R011 is turned OFF
Note
• When the shift input is ON, the shift operation is performed every scan. Use a transitional
contact for the shift input to detect the state changing.
• For the data input and the shift input, direct linking to a connecting point is not allowed. In this
case, insert a dummy contact (always ON special device = S04F, etc.) just before the input.
( )
D SR
S (n)
E
Q
Not allowed
A
Dummy contact
( )
D SR
S (n)
E
Q
Allowed
A
Basic Hardware and Function 169
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 075
DSR
Bi-directional shift register
Expression
Data input
Shift input
Enable input
− D DSR Q − Output
− S (n)
− E
Direction input − L
A
Function
While the enable input (E) is ON, this instruction shifts the data of the bit table, size n starting with
A, 1 bit when the shift input (S) is ON. The shift direction is determined by the state of the direction
input (L).
When L is OFF, the direction is right (lower address direction).
When L is ON, the direction is left (upper address direction).
The state of the data input (D) is stored in the highest bit if right shift, and stored in the lowest bit A
if left shift. The pushed out bit state is stored in the carry flag (CF = S050).
When the enable input (E) is OFF, all bits in the table and the carry flag are reset to OFF.
Execution condition
Enable
input
Operation
Output
OFF
CF
OFF Resets all bits in the bit table
Reset
ON
S = ON
L = ON
L = OFF
Shift left execution
Shift right execution
Highest bit state Set or reset
Lowest bit state Set or reset
S = OFF No execution
Highest bit state
−
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
1 - 64
X
Y
√
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Leading device
n Device size
√
√
Example
170 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
9 devices starting with R200 (R200 to R208) is specified as a shift register.
When R010 is OFF, the data of the shift register is reset to 0. (R200 to R208 are reset to OFF)
The carry flag (CF = S050) is also reset to OFF.
While R010 is ON the following operation is enabled.
• When X00A is ON (shift left), the data of the shift register is shifted 1 bit to the upper
address direction when X009 is changed from OFF to ON. At the same time, the state of
X008 is stored in the leading bit (R200). The output (R012) indicates the state of the highest
bit (R208).
• When X00A is OFF (shift right), the data of the shift register is shifted 1 bit to the lower
address direction when X009 is changed from OFF to ON. At the same time, the state of
X008 is stored in the highest bit (R208). The output (R012) indicates the state of the lowest
bit (R200).
The figure below shows an operation example.
(When X00A is ON and X009 is changed from OFF to ON)
CF
R208 R207 R206 R205 R204 R203 R202 R201 R200
X008
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
Shift result
R012 is turned OFF
(When X00A is OFF and X009 is changed from OFF to ON)
X008
R208 R207 R206 R205 R204 R203 R202 R201 R200
CF
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
Shift result
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
R012 is turned ON
Note
• When the shift input is ON, the shift operation is performed every scan. Use a transitional
contact for the shift input to detect the state changing.
• For the data input, the shift input and the enable input, direct linking to a connecting point is not
allowed. In this case, insert a dummy contact (always ON special device = S04F, etc.) just
before the input. Refer to Note of Shift register FUN 074.
Basic Hardware and Function 171
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 078
RTR1
1 bit rotate right
Expression
Input −[ RTR1 A ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, the data of register A is rotated 1 bit to the right (LSB direction). The pushed
out bit state is stored in the left most bit (MSB) and in the carry flag (CF = S050). After the
operation, if the right most bit (LSB) is ON, the output is turned ON.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
CF
−
Set or reset
Set or reset
OFF No execution
ON
Execution When LSB = 1
When LSB = 0
OFF
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Operation data
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
When X007 is changed from OFF to ON, the data of RW15 is rotated 1 bit to the right.
The figure below shows an operation example.
(MSB)
F
(LSB)
E
D
C
B
A
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RW15
0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0
CF
0
RW15
0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1
(Result)
R001 is turned ON
172 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 079
RTL1
1 bit rotate left
Expression
Input −[ RTL1 A ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, the data of register A is rotated 1 bit to the left (MSB direction). The pushed
out bit state is stored in the right most bit (LSB) and in the carry flag (CF = S050). After the
operation, if the left most bit (MSB) is ON, the output is turned ON.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
CF
−
Set or reset
Set or reset
OFF No execution
ON
Execution When MSB = 1
When MSB = 0
OFF
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Operation data
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
When X008 is changed from OFF to ON, the data of RW15 is rotated 1 bit to the left.
The figure below shows an operation example.
(MSB)
F
(LSB)
0
E
D
C
B
A
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0
1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1
R002 is turned ON
RW15
CF
1
RW15 (Result)
Basic Hardware and Function 173
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 080
RTR
n bit rotate right
Expression
Input −[ A RTR n → B ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, the data of register A is rotated n bits to the right (LSB direction), and stored
in B. After the operation, if the right most bit (LSB) is ON, the output is turned ON.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
CF
−
Set or reset
Set or reset
OFF No execution
ON
Execution When LSB = 1
When LSB = 0
OFF
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Source
n Shift bits
B Destination
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
1 - 16
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
When X007 is changed from OFF to ON, the data of RW18 is rotated 5 bits to the right and the
result is stored in RW20.
The figure below shows an operation example.
∗
(MSB)
F
(LSB)
E
D
C
B
A
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RW18
0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0
CF
1
RW20
1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0
(Result)
∗
R001 is turned OFF
174 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 081
RTL
n bit rotate left
Expression
Input −[ A RTL n → B ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, the data of register A is rotated n bits to the left (MSB direction), and stored
in B. After the operation, if the left most bit (MSB) is ON, the output is turned ON.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
CF
−
Set or reset
Set or reset
OFF No execution
ON
Execution When MSB = 1
When MSB = 0
OFF
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Source
n Shift bits
B Destination
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
1 - 16
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
When X008 is changed from OFF to ON, the data of RW18 is rotated 3 bits to the left and the
result is stored in RW20.
The figure below shows an operation example.
∗
(MSB)
F
(LSB)
0
E
D
C
B
A
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0
0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
R002 is turned OFF
RW18
CF
1
RW20 (Result)
∗
Basic Hardware and Function 175
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 090
MPX
Multiplexer
Expression
Input −[ A MPX (n) B → C ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, the data of the register which is designated by B in the table, size n starting
with A, is transferred to C.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF No execution
ON
Normal execution
Pointer over (no execution)
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Start of table
n Table size
B Pointer
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
1 - 64
0 - 63
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
C Destination
Example
When R010 is ON, the register data which is designated by RW30 is read from the table
D0500 to D0509 (10 registers size), and stored in D0005.
If the data of RW30 is 7, D0507 data is transferred to D0005.
Source table
D0500
D0501
Pointer
Destination
D0005
0
1
12345
D0507
D0508
D0509
12345
7
8
9
Note
• If the pointer data designates outside the table (10 or more in the above example), the transfer
is not executed and the output comes ON.
• The table must be within the effective range of the register address.
176 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 091
DPX
Demultiplexer
Expression
Input −[ A DPX (n) B → C ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, the data of A is transferred to the register which is designated byB in the
table, size n starting with C.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF No execution
ON
Normal execution
Pointer over (no execution)
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Source
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
n Table size
B Pointer
C Start of table
1 - 64
0 - 63
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
When R011 is ON, the data of XW04 is transferred to the register which is designated by
RW30 in the table D0500 to D0509 (10 registers size).
If the data of RW30 is 8, XW04 data is transferred to D0508.
Source
XW04
Destination table Pointer
3210
D0500
D0501
0
1
D0507
D0508
D0509
7
8
9
3210
Note
• If the pointer data designates outside the table (10 or more in the above example), the transfer
is not executed and the output comes ON.
• The table must be within the effective range of the register address.
Basic Hardware and Function 177
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 096
Greater than
>
Expression
Input −[ A > B ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B are compared, and if A is greater than B, the
output is turned ON.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
OFF No execution
ON
Execution
A > B
A ≤ B
OFF
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Compared
data
B Reference
data
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
When R00C is ON, the data of D0125 is compared with the constant data 2500, and if the data
of D0125 is greater than 2500, R020 is turned ON.
If the data of D0125 is 3000, the comparison result is true. Consequently, R020 is turned ON.
D0125
If the data of D0125 is -100, the comparison result is false. Consequently, R020 is turned OFF.
D0125 -100 Constant 2500 R020 is OFF
Note
3000
>
Constant 2500
R020 is ON
≤
• This instruction deals with the data as signed integer (-32768 to 32767).
178 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 097
Greater than or equal
>=
Expression
Input −[ A >= B ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B are compared, and if A is greater than or
equal to B, the output is turned ON.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
OFF No execution
ON
Execution
A ≥ B
A < B
OFF
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Compared
data
B Reference
data
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
When R00C is ON, the data of D0125 is compared with the data of D0020, and if the data of
D0125 is greater than or equal to the data of D0020, R020 is turned ON.
If the data of D0125 is 3000 and that of D0020 is 3000, the comparison result is true.
Consequently, R020 is turned ON.
D0125
3000
≥
D0020
3000
R020 is ON
If the data of D0125 is -1500 and that of D0020 is 0, the comparison result is false.
Consequently, R020 is turned OFF.
D0125
-1500
<
D0020
0
R020 is OFF
Note
• This instruction deals with the data as signed integer (-32768 to 32767).
Basic Hardware and Function 179
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 098
Equal
=
Expression
Input −[ A = B ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B are compared, and if A is equal to B, the
output is turned ON.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
OFF No execution
ON
Execution
A = B
A ≠ B
OFF
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Compared
data
B Reference
data
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
When R00C is ON, the data of D0125 is compared with the data of D0030, and if the data of
D0125 is equal to the data of D0030, R020 is turned ON.
If the data of D0125 is 3000 and that of D0020 is 3000, the comparison result is true.
Consequently, R020 is turned ON.
D0125
3000
=
D0030
3000
R020 is ON
If the data of D0125 is -1500 and that of D0020 is 0, the comparison result is false.
Consequently, R020 is turned OFF.
D0125
Note
-1500
≠
D0030
0
R020 is OFF
• This instruction deals with the data as signed integer (-32768 to 32767).
180 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 099
Not equal
<>
Expression
Input −[ A <> B ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B are compared, and if A is not equal to B, the
output is turned ON.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
OFF No execution
ON
Execution
A ≠ B
A = B
OFF
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Compared
data
B Reference
data
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
When R00C is ON, the data of D0125 is compared with the constant data 0, and if the data of
D0125 is not 0, R020 is turned ON.
If the data of D0125 is 10, the comparison result is true. Consequently, R020 is turned ON.
D0125
If the data of D0125 is 0, the comparison result is false. Consequently, R020 is turned OFF.
D0125 Constant R020 is OFF
10
≠
Constant
0
R020 is ON
0
=
0
Note
• This instruction deals with the data as signed integer (-32768 to 32767).
Basic Hardware and Function 181
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 100
Less than
<
Expression
Input −[ A < B ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B are compared, and if A is less than B, the
output is turned ON.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
OFF No execution
ON
Execution
A < B
A ≥ B
OFF
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Compared
data
B Reference
data
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
When R00C is ON, the data of D0125 is compared with the data of D0040, and if the data of
D0125 is less than the data of D0040, R020 is turned ON.
If the data of D0125 is 10 and that of D0040 is 15, the comparison result is true. Consequently,
R020 is turned ON.
D0125
10
<
D0040
15
R020 is ON
If the data of D0125 is 0 and that of D0040 is -50, the comparison result is false.
Consequently, R020 is turned OFF.
D0125
Note
0
≥
D0040
0
R020 is OFF
• This instruction deals with the data as signed integer (-32768 to 32767).
182 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 101
Less than or equal
<=
Expression
Input −[ A <= B ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B are compared, and if A is less than or equal
to B, the output is turned ON.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
OFF No execution
ON
Execution
A ≤ B
A > B
OFF
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Compared
data
B Reference
data
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
When R00C is ON, the data of D0125 is compared with the constant data -100, and if the data
of D0125 is less than or equal to -100, R020 is turned ON.
If the data of D0125 is -150, the comparison result is true. Consequently, R020 is turned ON.
D0125
If the data of D0125 is 0, the comparison result is false. Consequently, R020 is turned OFF.
D0125 Constant -100 R020 is OFF
-150
<
Constant
-100
R020 is ON
0
≥
Note
• This instruction deals with the data as signed integer (-32768 to 32767).
Basic Hardware and Function 183
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 102
Double-word greater than
D>
Expression
Input −[ A+1⋅A D> B+1⋅B ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, the double-word data of A+1⋅A and B+1⋅B are compared, and if A+1⋅A is
greater than B+1⋅B, the output is turned ON.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
OFF No execution
ON
Execution
A+1⋅A > B+1⋅B
A+1⋅A ≤ B+1⋅B
OFF
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Compared
data
B Reference
data
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
When R010 is ON, the data of D0101⋅D0100 is compared with the constant data 200000, and
if the data of D0101⋅D0100 is greater than 200000, R014 is turned ON.
If the data of D0101⋅D0100 is 250000, the comparison result is true. Consequently, R014 is
turned ON.
D0101⋅D0100
250000
>
Constant
200000
R014 is ON
If the data of D0101⋅D0100 is -100, the comparison result is false. Consequently, R014 is
turned OFF.
D0101⋅D0100
Note
-100
≤
Constant
200000
R014 is OFF
• This instruction deals with the data as double-word integer (-2147483648 to 2147483647).
184 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 103
Double-word greater than or equal
D>=
Expression
Input −[ A+1⋅A D>= B+1⋅B ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, the double-word data of A+1⋅A and B+1⋅B are compared, and if A+1⋅A is
greater than or equal to B+1⋅B, the output is turned ON.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
OFF No execution
ON
Execution
A+1⋅A ≥ B+1⋅B
A+1⋅A < B+1⋅B
OFF
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Compared
data
B Reference
data
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
When R010 is ON, the double-word data of D0101⋅D0100 is compared with the double-word
data of D0251⋅D0250, and if the data of D0101⋅D0100 is greater than or equal to the data of
D0251⋅D0250, R014 is turned ON.
If the data of D0101⋅D0100 is 250000 and D0251⋅D0250 is 200000, R014 is turned ON.
D0101⋅D0100
If the data of D0101⋅D0100 is -100 and D0251⋅D0250 is 0, R014 is turned OFF.
D0101⋅D0100 -100 D0251⋅D0250
Note
250000
≥
D0251⋅D0250
200000
R014 is ON
<
0
R014 is OFF
• This instruction deals with the data as double-word integer (-2147483648 to 2147483647).
Basic Hardware and Function 185
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 104
Double-word equal
D=
Expression
Input −[ A+1⋅A D= B+1⋅B ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, the double-word data of A+1⋅A and B+1⋅B are compared, and if A+1⋅A is
equal to B+1⋅B, the output is turned ON.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
OFF No execution
ON
Execution
A+1⋅A = B+1⋅B
A+1⋅A ≠ B+1⋅B
OFF
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Compared
data
B Reference
data
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
When R010 is ON, the double-word data of D0101⋅D0100 is compared with the double-word
data of D0251⋅D0250, and if the data of D0101⋅D0100 is equal to the data of D0251⋅D0250,
R014 is turned ON.
If the data of D0101⋅D0100 is 250000 and D0251⋅D0250 is 250000, R014 is turned ON.
D0101⋅D0100
If the data of D0101⋅D0100 is -100 and D0251⋅D0250 is 0, R014 is turned OFF.
D0101⋅D0100 -100 D0251⋅D0250
Note
250000
=
D0251⋅D0250
250000
R014 is ON
≠
0
R014 is OFF
• This instruction deals with the data as double-word integer (-2147483648 to 2147483647).
186 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 105
Double-word not equal
D<>
Expression
Input −[ A+1⋅A D<> B+1⋅B ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, the double-word data of A+1⋅A and B+1⋅B are compared, and if A+1⋅A is not
equal to B+1⋅B, the output is turned ON.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
OFF No execution
ON
Execution
A+1⋅A ≠ B+1⋅B
A+1⋅A = B+1⋅B
OFF
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Compared
data
B Reference
data
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
When R010 is ON, the double-word data of D0101⋅D0100 is compared with the double-word
data of D0251⋅D0250, and if the data of D0101⋅D0100 is not equal to the data of
D0251⋅D0250, R014 is turned ON.
If the data of D0101⋅D0100 is 250000 and D0251⋅D0250 is 200000, R014 is turned ON.
D0101⋅D0100
If the data of D0101⋅D0100 is -100 and D0251⋅D0250 is -100, R014 is turned OFF.
D0101⋅D0100 -100 D0251⋅D0250 -100 R014 is OFF
Note
250000
≠
D0251⋅D0250
250000
R014 is ON
=
• This instruction deals with the data as double-word integer (-2147483648 to 2147483647).
Basic Hardware and Function 187
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 106
Double-word less than
D<
Expression
Input −[ A+1⋅A D< B+1⋅B ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, the double-word data of A+1⋅A and B+1⋅B are compared, and if A+1⋅A is
less than B+1⋅B, the output is turned ON.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
OFF No execution
ON
Execution
A+1⋅A < B+1⋅B
A+1⋅A ≥ B+1⋅B
OFF
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Compared
data
B Reference
data
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
When R010 is ON, the data of D0101⋅D0100 is compared with the constant data 427780, and
if the data of D0101⋅D0100 is less than 427780, R014 is turned ON.
If the data of D0101⋅D0100 is 250000, R014 is turned ON.
D0101⋅D0100
If the data of D0101⋅D0100 is 430000, R014 is turned OFF.
D0101⋅D0100 430000 Constant 427780
Note
250000
<
Constant
427780
R014 is ON
R014 is OFF
≥
• This instruction deals with the data as double-word integer (-2147483648 to 2147483647).
188 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 107
Double-word less than or equal
D<=
Expression
Input −[ A+1⋅A D<= B+1⋅B ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, the double-word data of A+1⋅A and B+1⋅B are compared, and if A+1⋅A is
less than or equal to B+1⋅B, the output is turned ON.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
OFF No execution
ON
Execution
A+1⋅A ≤ B+1⋅B
A+1⋅A > B+1⋅B
OFF
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Compared
data
B Reference
data
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
When R010 is ON, the data of D0101⋅D0100 is compared with the constant data 0, and if the
data of D0101⋅D0100 is less than or equal to 0, R014 is turned ON.
If the data of D0101⋅D0100 is -1, R014 is turned ON.
D0101⋅D0100
If the data of D0101⋅D0100 is 10000, R014 is turned OFF.
D0101⋅D0100 10000 Constant
Note
-1
≤
Constant
0
0
R014 is ON
R014 is OFF
>
• This instruction deals with the data as double-word integer (-2147483648 to 2147483647).
Basic Hardware and Function 189
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 108
Unsigned greater than
U>
Expression
Input −[ A U> B ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B are compared, and if A is greater than B, the
output is turned ON.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
OFF No execution
ON
Execution
A > B
A ≤ B
OFF
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Compared
data
B Reference
data
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
When R00C is ON, the data of D0125 is compared with the constant data 40000, and if the
data of D0125 is greater than 40000, R020 is turned ON.
If the data of D0125 is 52000, the comparison result is true. Consequently, R020 is turned ON.
D0125 52000 Constant 40000 R020 is ON
>
If the data of D0125 is 21000, the comparison result is false. Consequently, R020 is turned
OFF.
D0125
Note
21000
≤
Constant 40000
R020 is OFF
• This instruction deals with the data as unsigned integer (0 to 65535).
190 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 109
Unsigned greater than or equal
U>=
Expression
Input −[ A >= B ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B are compared, and if A is greater than or
equal to B, the output is turned ON.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
OFF No execution
ON
Execution
A ≥ B
A < B
OFF
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Compared
data
B Reference
data
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
When R00C is ON, the data of D0125 is compared with the data of D0020, and if the data of
D0125 is greater than or equal to the data of D0020, R020 is turned ON.
If the data of D0125 is 40000 and that of D0020 is 40000, the comparison result is true.
Consequently, R020 is turned ON.
D0125
40000
≥
D0020
40000
R020 is ON
If the data of D0125 is 15000 and that of D0020 is 20000, the comparison result is false.
Consequently, R020 is turned OFF.
D0125
15000
<
D0020
20000
R020 is OFF
Note
• This instruction deals with the data as unsigned integer (0 to 65535).
Basic Hardware and Function 191
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 110
Unsigned equal
U=
Expression
Input −[ A U= B ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B are compared, and if A is equal to B, the
output is turned ON.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
OFF No execution
ON
Execution
A = B
A ≠ B
OFF
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Compared
data
B Reference
data
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
When R00C is ON, the data of D0125 is compared with the data of D0030, and if the data of
D0125 is equal to the data of D0030, R020 is turned ON.
If the data of D0125 is 35000 and that of D0020 is 35000, the comparison result is true.
Consequently, R020 is turned ON.
D0125
35000
=
D0030
35000
R020 is ON
If the data of D0125 is 1500 and that of D0020 is 4000, the comparison result is false.
Consequently, R020 is turned OFF.
D0125
Note
1500
≠
D0030
4000
R020 is OFF
• This instruction deals with the data as unsigned integer (0 to 65535).
192 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 111
Unsigned not equal
U<>
Expression
Input −[ A U<> B ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B are compared, and if A is not equal to B, the
output is turned ON.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
OFF No execution
ON
Execution
A ≠ B
A = B
OFF
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Compared
data
B Reference
data
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
When R00C is ON, the data of D0125 is compared with the constant data 0, and if the data of
D0125 is not 0, R020 is turned ON.
If the data of D0125 is 41000, the comparison result is true. Consequently, R020 is turned ON.
D0125
If the data of D0125 is 0, the comparison result is false. Consequently, R020 is turned OFF.
D0125 Constant R020 is OFF
41000
≠
Constant
0
R020 is ON
0
=
0
Note
• This instruction deals with the data as unsigned integer (0 to 65535).
Basic Hardware and Function 193
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 112
Unsigned less than
U<
Expression
Input −[ A U< B ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B are compared, and if A is less than B, the
output is turned ON.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
OFF No execution
ON
Execution
A < B
A ≥ B
OFF
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Compared
data
B Reference
data
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
When R00C is ON, the data of D0125 is compared with the data of D0040, and if the data of
D0125 is less than the data of D0040, R020 is turned ON.
If the data of D0125 is 43000 and that of D0040 is 45000, the comparison result is true.
Consequently, R020 is turned ON.
D0125
43000
<
D0040
45000
R020 is ON
If the data of D0125 is 50000 and that of D0040 is 50000, the comparison result is false.
Consequently, R020 is turned OFF.
D0125
Note
50000
≥
D0040
50000
R020 is OFF
• This instruction deals with the data as unsigned integer (0 to 65535).
194 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 113
Unsigned less than or equal
U<=
Expression
Input −[ A U<= B ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, the data of A and the data of B are compared, and if A is less than or equal
to B, the output is turned ON.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
OFF No execution
ON
Execution
A ≤ B
A > B
OFF
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Compared
data
B Reference
data
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
When R00C is ON, the data of D0125 is compared with the constant data 35000, and if the
data of D0125 is less than or equal to 35000, R020 is turned ON.
If the data of D0125 is 35000, the comparison result is true. Consequently, R020 is turned ON.
D0125 35000 Constant 35000 R020 is ON
If the data of D0125 is 0, the comparison result is false. Consequently, R020 is turned OFF.
D0125 38000 Constant 35000 R020 is OFF
≤
>
Note
• This instruction deals with the data as unsigned integer (0 to 65535).
Basic Hardware and Function 195
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 114
SET
Device/register set
Expression
Input −[ SET A ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, the device A is set to ON if A is a device, or the data HFFFF is stored in the
register A if A is a register.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
OFF No execution
ON
Execution
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Device or
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
register
Example 1 (device set)
When R010 is ON, R025 is set to ON. The state of R025 is remained even if R010 comes
OFF.
Example 2 (register set)
When R010 is ON, the data HFFFF is stored in RW20. (R200 to R20F are set to ON)
The state of RW20 is remained even if R010 comes OFF.
196 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 115
RST
Device/register reset
Expression
Input −[ RST A ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, the device A is reset to OFF ifA is a device, or the data 0 is stored in the
register A if A is a register.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
OFF No execution
ON
Execution
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Device or
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
register
Example 1 (device reset)
When R011 is ON, R005 is reset to OFF. The state of R025 is remained even if R011 comes
OFF.
Example 2 (register reset)
When R011 is ON, the data 0 is stored in RW20. (R200 to R20F are reset to OFF)
The state of RW20 is remained even if R011 comes OFF.
Basic Hardware and Function 197
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 118
SETC
Set carry
Expression
Input −[ SETC ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, the carry flag (CF = S050) is set to ON.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
CF
−
Set
OFF No execution
ON
Execution
Operand
No operand is required.
Example
When R011 is changed from OFF to ON, the carry flag S050 is set to ON.
198 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 119
RSTC
Reset carry
Expression
Input −[ RSTC ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, the carry flag (CF = S050) is reset to OFF.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
CF
−
Reset
OFF No execution
ON
Execution
Operand
No operand is required.
Example
When R010 is changed from OFF to ON, the carry flag S050 is reset to OFF.
Basic Hardware and Function 199
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 120
ENC
Encode
Expression
Input −[ A ENC (n) B ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, this instruction finds the bit position of the most significant ON bit in the bit
table, size 2n bits starting with 0 bit (LSB) of A, and stores it in B.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
ERF
−
−
Set
OFF No execution
ON
Normal execution
There is no ON bit (no execution)
OFF
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
1 - 8
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
√
I
J
K
A Start of table
n Table size
√
√
√
√
√
√
B Encode result
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
25 (=32) bits starting with 0 bit of RW05 (R050 to R06F) are defined as the bit table.
When R010 is ON, the most significant ON (1) bit position in the bit table is searched, and the
position is stored in D0010.
The following figure shows an operation example.
RW06
RW05
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
3
2
1
0
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0
0 0 1 0
D0010
26
Note
• If there is no ON bit in the bit table, the instruction error flag (ERF = S051) is set to ON.
200 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 121
DEC
Decode
Expression
Input −[ A DEC (n) B ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, this instruction sets the bit position which is designated by lower n bits of A
to ON in the bit table, size 2n bits starting with 0 bit (LSB) of B, and resets all other bits to OFF.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
OFF No execution
ON
Execution
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
1 - 8
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
√
I
√
J
√
K
√
A Decode source
n Table size
√
√
√
√
√
√
B Start of table
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
25 (=32) bits starting with 0 bit of RW05 (R050 to R06F) are defined as the bit table.
When R011 is ON, the bit position designated by lower 5 bits of D0011 in the bit table is set to
ON, and all other bits in the table are reset to OFF.
The following figure shows an operation example.
F
E D C B A
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
D0011
1 1 0 0 0
Ignored
Sets ON
H18 (=24)
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
3
2
1
0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
RW06
RW05
Basic Hardware and Function 201
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 122
BC
Bit count
Expression
Input −[ A BC B ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, this instruction counts the number of ON (1) bits of A, and stores the result
in B.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
OFF No execution
ON
Execution
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Source
B Count data
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
When R020 is ON, the number of ON (1) bits of the register RW032 is counted, and the result
is stored in D0102.
The following figure shows an operation example.
F
E D C B A
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RW032 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0
Counts the number of ON (1) bits = 7
F
E D C B A
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
D0102 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1
The result data (7) is stored in binary
202 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 128
CALL
Subroutine call
Expression
Input −[ CALL N. n ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, this instruction calls the subroutine numbern.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
OFF No execution
ON
Execution
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
n Subroutine
√ (Note)
number
Example
When X007 is ON, the subroutine number 8 is called. When the program execution is returned
from the subroutine, the output is turned ON.
Main program
Subroutine
| | [ CALL N.008 ]
[ SUBR (008)]
[ RET ]
Note
• The possible subroutine number is 0 to 15 (T1) or 0 to 255 (T1S).
• Refer to the SUBR instruction (FUN 137).
• In case of T1, nesting of subroutines is not allowed. That is, the CALL instruction cannot be
used in a subroutine.
• In case of T1S, nesting of subroutines is possible. (up to 3 levels)
• The CALL instruction can be used in an interrupt program. However, it is not allowed that the
same subroutine is called from an interrupt program and from main program.
Basic Hardware and Function 203
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 129
RET
Subroutine return
Expression
−−[ RET ]−
Function
This instruction indicates the end of a subroutine. When program execution is reached this
instruction, it is returned to the original CALL instruction.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
-
-
Execution
Operand
No operand is required.
Example
Main program
Subroutine
| | [ CALL N.008 ]
[ SUBR (008)]
[ RET ]
Note
• Refer to the SUBR instruction (FUN 137).
• The RET instruction can be programmed only in the program type ‘Subroutine’.
• The RET instruction must be connected directly to the left power rail.
204 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 132
FOR
FOR (FOR-NEXT loop)
Expression
Input −[ FOR n ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, the program segment between FOR and NEXT is executed n times
repeatedly in a scan.
When the input is OFF, the repetition is not performed. (the segment is executed once)
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
OFF No repetition
ON
Repetition
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
1 - 32767
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
√
I
√
J
√
K
√
n Repetition
√
√
√
√
√
√
times
Example
This segment is executed 30 times repeatedly in a scan.
When R005 is ON, the program segment between FOR and NEXT is executed 30 times in a
scan.
R005
| | [ FOR 30 ]
Executed 30 times in a scan when
R005 is ON.
[ NEXT ]
Basic Hardware and Function 205
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 133
NEXT
NEXT (FOR-NEXT loop)
Expression
Input −[ NEXT ]− Output
Function
This instruction configures a FOR-NEXT loop.
If the input is OFF, The repetition is forcibly broken. and the program execution is moved to the
next instruction.
Execution condition
Input
OFF Forcibly breaks the repetition
ON Repetition
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
Operand
No operand is required.
Example
When R005 is ON, the program segment between FOR and NEXT is executed 30 times in a
scan. In the above example, the rung 3 is executed 30 times. As a result, the data of D0000 to
D0029 are transferred to D0500 to D0529. (Block transfer)
Note
• The FOR instruction must be used with a corresponding NEXT instruction one by one.
• Nesting of the FOR-NEXT loop is not allowed. That is, the FOR instruction cannot be used in a
FOR-NEXT loop.
• The FOR and NEXT instructions cannot be programmed on the same rung.
• The following connection is not allowed.
| | [ FOR n ]
| | [ NEXT ]
| |
| |
206 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 137
SUBR
Subroutine entry
Expression
−[ SUBR (n) ]−−
Function
This instruction indicates the begging of a subroutine.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
-
-
Execution
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
n Subroutine
√ (Note)
number
Example
The begging of the subroutine number 8 is indicated.
Main program
Subroutine
| | [ CALL N.008 ]
[ SUBR (008)]
[ RET ]
Note
• The possible subroutine number is 0 to 15 (T1) or 0 to 255 (T1S).
• Refer to the CALL instruction (FUN 128) and the RET instruction (FUN 129).
• The SUBR instruction can be programmed only in the program type‘Subroutine’.
• Nesting of subroutine is not allowed. That is, the CALL instruction cannot be used in a
subroutine.
• No other instruction cannot be placed on the rung of the SUBR instruction.
Basic Hardware and Function 207
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 140
EI
Enable interrupt
Expression
Input −[ EI ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, this instruction enables the execution of user designated interrupt operation,
i.e. timer interrupt program and I/O interrupt programs.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
OFF No execution
ON
Execution
Operand
No operand is required.
Example
In the above example, the DI instruction disables the interrupt. Then the EI instruction enables
the interrupt again. As a result, the rung 2 instructions can be executed without interruption
between each instructions.
Note
• Refer to the DI instruction (FUN 141).
• If an interrupt factor is occurred during the interrupt disabled state, the interrupt is kept waiting
and it will be executed just after the EI instruction is executed.
• The EI instruction can be used only in the main program.
208 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 141
DI
Disable interrupt
Expression
Input −[ DI ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, this instruction disables the execution of user designated interrupt operation,
i.e. timer interrupt program and I/O interrupt programs.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
OFF No execution
ON
Execution
Operand
No operand is required.
Example
In the above example, the interrupt is disabled when R000 is ON, and it is enabled when R000
is OFF.
Note
• Refer to the EI instruction (FUN 140).
• If an interrupt factor is occurred during the interrupt disabled state, the interrupt is kept waiting
and it will be executed just after the EI instruction is executed.
• The DI instruction can be used only in the main program.
Basic Hardware and Function 209
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 142
IRET
Interrupt return
Expression
−−[ IRET ]−
Function
This instruction indicates the end of an interrupt program. When program execution reaches this
instruction, it returns to the original location of the main program (or subroutine).
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
-
-
Execution
Operand
No operand is required.
Example
An interrupt program
(Timer interrupt,
I/O interrupt #1, #2, #3 or #4)
Note
• The IRET instruction can be used only in an interrupt program.
• There is no specific instruction which indicates the beginning of the interrupt program.
210 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 143
WDT
Watchdog timer reset
Expression
Input −[ WDT n ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, this instruction extend the scan time over detection time by 200 ms.
Normally, T1/T1S detects the scan time-over if a scan is not finished within 200 ms. This instruction
can be used to extend the detection time.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
OFF No execution
ON
Execution
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
1 - 100
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
n Extend time
Example
When R020 is ON, the scan time detection time is extended by 200 ms. The operand n has no
effect on the extended time. It is fixed as 200 ms.
Normal detection point
Extended point
0
50
100
150
200
250 300 (ms)
Extended by 200 ms
Scan
WDT instruction
execution
Note
• As for the upper T-series PLCs, the operand n specifies the extended time. However in the
T1/T1S, it is fixed as 200 ms regardless of the operand n.
Basic Hardware and Function 211
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 144
STIZ
Step sequence initialize
Expression
Input −[ STIZ (n) A ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, n devices starting with A are reset to OFF, and A is set to ON.
This instruction is used to initialize a series of step sequence. The step sequence is useful to
describe a sequential operation.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
OFF No execution
ON
Execution at the rising edge of the input
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
1 - 64
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
n Size of step
sequence
A Start device
√
Example
When R020 is changed from OFF to ON, R400 is set to ON and subsequent 9 devices (R401
to R409) are reset to OFF.
This instruction initializes a series of step sequence, 10 devices starting with R400.
R409
R408
R407
R406
R405
R404
R403
R402
R401
R400
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
ON
10 devices starting with R400
Note
• The STIZ instruction is used together with STIN (FUN 145) and STOT (FUN 146) instructions to
configure the step sequence.
• The STIZ instruction is executed only when the input is changed from OFF to ON.
212 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 145
STIN
Step sequence input
Expression
Input −[ STIN A ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON and the device A is ON, the output is set to ON.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
OFF No execution
ON
When A is ON
When A is OFF
OFF
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
K
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
A Step device
√
Example
The following sequential operation is performed.
When R020 is changed from OFF to ON, R400 is set to ON and subsequent 9 devices (R401
to R409) are reset to OFF.
When X004 comes ON, R400 is reset to OFF and R401 is set to ON.
When both X005 and R022 are ON, R401 is reset to OFF and R402 is set to ON.
R020
X004
X005
R022
R400
R401
R402
Basic Hardware and Function 213
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 146
STOT
Step sequence output
Expression
Input −[ STOT A ]−
Function
When the input is ON, the device A is set to ON and the devices of STIN instructions on the same
rung are reset to OFF.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
-
-
OFF No execution
ON
Execution
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Step device
√
Example
See example on STIN (FUN 145) instruction.
Note
• The STIZ, STIN and STOT instructions are used together to configure the step sequence.
• Two or more STOT instructions can be placed on one rung to perform simultaneous sequences.
• Two or more STIN instructions can be placed on one rung in parallel or in series to perform loop
or convergence of sequences. (Max. 11 STIN instructions on one rung)
• To perform the conditional branch (sequence selection), separate the rungs as follows.
This limitation is applied to T1 version 1.00 only.
[ STIN A ]
| |
| |
[ STOT B ]
[ STIN A ]
| |
| |
[ STOT B ]
[ STOT C ]
[ STIN A ]
[ STOT C ]
Not allowed
Available
214 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 147
F/F
Flip-flop
Expression
Set input
− S F/F Q − Output
Reset input − R
A
Function
When the set input is ON, the device A is set to ON. When the reset input is ON, the device A is
reset to OFF. When both the set and reset inputs are OFF, the device A remains the state. If both
the set and reset inputs are ON, the device A is reset to OFF.
The state of the output is the same as the device A.
Execution condition
Set
input
OFF
Reset
input
Operation
Output
OFF No execution (A remains previous state)
ON Resets A to OFF
OFF Sets A to ON
Same
as A
ON
ON
Resets A to OFF
Operand
Name
Device
Register
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
C
D
I
J
K
A Device
√
√
√
Example
When X003 is ON, R10E is set to ON. When X004 is ON, R10E is reset to OFF. If both are
ON, R10E is reset to OFF.
An example timing diagram is shown below.
X003
X004
R10E
Note
• For the set input, direct linking to a connecting point is not allowed. In this case, insert a dummy
contact (always ON = S04F, etc.) just before the input. Refer to Note of Shift register FUN 074.
Basic Hardware and Function 215
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 149
U/D
Up-down counter
Expression
Direction input − U U/D Q − Output
Count input
Enable input
− C
− E
A
Function
While the enable input is ON, this instruction counts the number of the count input changes from
OFF to ON. The count direction (up count or down count) is selected by the state of the direction
input. The count value is stored in the counter register A. The count value range is 0 to 65535.
• Up count when the direction input is ON
• Down count when the direction input is OFF
When the enable input is OFF, the counter register A is cleared to 0.
Execution condition
Enable
input
Operation
Output
OFF No operation (A is cleared to 0)
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
Count value is not limit value (0 or 65535)
Count value is limit value and count input is ON
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Count value
√
Example
Note
X005
X006
R010
C005
C.005
• The transitional contact is required for
the count input. Otherwise, counting is
executed every scan during X005 is ON
in this example.
• For the direction input and the count
input, direct linking to a connecting point
is not allowed. Refer to Note of Shift
register FUN 074.
3
3
2
2
2
1
1
1
216 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 154
CLND
Set calendar
Expression
Input −[ A CLND ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, the built-in clock/calendar is set to the date and time specified by 6 registers
starting with A. If an invalid data is contained in the registers, the operation is not executed and the
output is turned ON.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF No operation
ON
Execution (data is valid))
No execution (data is not valid)
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Start of table
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
When R020 is ON, the clock/calendar is set according to the data of D0050 to D0055, and the
output is OFF (R0031 is OFF).
If D0050 to D0055 contains invalid data, the setting operation is not executed and the output is
turned ON (R0031 comes ON).
Allowable data range (2-digit BCD)
F
8 7
0
D0050
D0051
D0052
D0053
D0054
D0055
H00
H00
H00
H00
H00
H00
Year
Month
Day
Hour
Minute
Second
H00 to H99 (1990 - 2089)
H01 to H12
H01 to H31
H00 to H23
H00 to H59
Calendar
LSI
H00 to H59
Note
• The day of the week is automatically.
Basic Hardware and Function 217
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 155
CLDS
Calendar operation
Expression
Input −[ A CLDS B ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, this instruction subtracts the date and time stored in 6 registers starting with
A from the current date and time, and stores the result in 6 registers starting with B.
If an invalid data is contained in the registers, the operation is not executed and the output is
turned ON.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF No operation
ON
Execution (data is valid))
No execution (data is not valid)
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Subtrahend
B Result
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
When R020 is ON, the date and time data recorded in D0050 to D0055 are subtracted from
the current date and time of clock/calendar, and the result is stored in D0100 to D0105.
In normal operation, the output is OFF (R0035 is OFF). If D0050 to D0055 contains invalid
data, the operation is not executed and the output is turned ON (R0035 comes ON).
Current date & time
F
0
F
0
H0098
H0001
H0015
H0017
H0000
H0000
D0050
D0051
D0052
D0053
D0054
D0055
H0097
H0010
H0010
H0015
H0030
H0000
D0100
D0101
D0102
D0103
D0104
D0105
H0000
H0003
H0007
H0001
H0030
H0000
(Year)
(Month)
(Day)
(Hour)
(Minute)
(Second)
minus
Note
• Future date and time cannot be used as subtrahend A.
• In the calculation result, it means that 1 year is 365 days and 1 month is 30 days.
218 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 156
PID3
Pre-derivative real PID
Expression
Input −[ A PID3 B → C ]− Output
Function
Performs PID (Proportional, Integral, Derivative) control which is a fundamental method of feed-
back control. (Pre-derivative real PID algorithm) This PID3 instruction has the following features.
• For derivative action, incomplete derivative is used to suppress interference of high-frequency
noise and to expand the stable application range,
• Controllability and stability are enhanced in case of limit operation for MV, by using digital PID
algorithm succeeding to benefits of analog PID.
• Auto, cascade and manual modes are supported in this instruction.
• Digital filter is available for PV.
• Direct / reverse operation is selectable.
Execution condition
Input
OFF Initialization
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
Execute PID every setting interval
ON when
execution
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Top of input data
B Top of parameter
C Top of output data
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Input data
Control parameter
Proportional gain
Integral time
Derivative time
Dead-band
A-mode initial SV
Input filter constant
ASV differential limit DSV
MMV differential limit DMMV
Initial status
MV upper limit
Output data
Manipulation value
Last error
Last derivative value
Last PV
A
A+1
A+2
A+3
A+4
A+5
B
B+1
B+2
B+3
B+4
B+5
B+6
B+7
B+8
C
Process input value
A-mode set value
C-mode set value
M-mode MV input
MV tracking input
Mode setting
PVC
ASV
CSV
MMV
TMV
KP
TI
TD
GP
ISV
FT
MV
en-1
Dn-1
PVn-1
SVn-1
Ir
C+1
C+2
C+3
C+4
C+5
C+6
C+7
C+8
C+9
Last SV
MODE
Integral remainder
Derivative remainder
Internal MV
Internal counter
Control interval
Dr
MVn
C
A-mode: Auto mode
C-mode: Cascade mode
M-mode: Manual mode
STS
MH
ML
DMV
n
B+9
∆t
B+10
B+11
B+12
MV lower limit
MV differential limit
Control interval setting
Basic Hardware and Function 219
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
Control block diagram
Integral
control
Integral
1
Auto
mode
⋅
TI s
∆
In
ASV
CSV
MVn
DSV
Proportional
1
+
-
Differential
MVCn
SVn
+
en
∆
Pn
∆
MVn
+
Gap
KP
MVS
H/L
DMV
MV
-
Derivative
Cascade
mode
MMV
⋅
∆
Dn
TD
η⋅
s
DMMV
⋅
1+
TD s
Manual
mode
Differential limit
PVn
η
(
= 0.1)
→
MVS: Velocity
Position
± ∆
PVC
1
MVn = MVn-1
H/L: Upper / lower limit
DMV: Differential limit
MVn
⋅
1+T s
Digtal filter
Integral action control:
When MV is limited (H/L, DMV) and the integral value has same sign as limit over, integral action
is stopped.
Velocity → Position conversion:
In Direct mode, MV increases when PV is increased.
In Reverse mode, MV decreases when PV is increased.
→ MVn = MVn-1 - ∆Mvn
→ MVn = MVn-1 + ∆MVn
Gap (dead-band) operation:
Error e
SV - PV
GP (%) GP (%)
Algorithm
Digital filter:
PVn =(1−FT)⋅PVC +FT ⋅PVn
−
1
Here,
0.000 ≤FT ≤0.999
220 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
PID algorithm:
∆MVn =KP ⋅(∆Pn +∆In +∆Dn
)
MVn =MVn − 1 ±∆MVn
Here,
∆Pn =en −en − 1
en SVn PVn
(If GP ≠ 0, Gap is applied)
=
−
en
⋅∆t +Ir
TI
(If TI = 0, then ∆In = 0)
∆In
=
D ⋅
T
n
− 1
−
n
−∆ ⋅
n
− 1
+
Dr
(PV
PV )
t D
∆
D
n
=
∆t +η⋅TD
Dn
=Dn − 1 +∆Dn
η = 0.1 (Fixed)
Parameter details
A
Process input value PVC (0.00 to 100.00 %)
Data range: 0 to 10000
A+1 Auto mode set value ASV (0.00 to 100.00 %)
A+2 Cascade mode set value CSV (0.00 to 100.00 %)
A+3 Manual mode MV MMV (-25.00 to 125.00 %)
A+4 MV tracking input TMV (-25.00 to 125.00 %)
A+5 Mode setting MODE
Data range: 0 to 10000
Data range: 0 to 10000
Data range: -2500 to 12500
Data range: -2500 to 12500
F
C
8
4
0
Operation mode
00 : Manual mode
01 : Auto mode
10 : Cascade mode
11 : (Reserve)
Tracking designation
0 : No
1 : Yes
B
Proportional gain KP (0.00 to 327.67)
Data range: 0 to 32767
B+1 Integral time TI (0.000 to 32.767 min., ∆In=0 if TI =0) Data range: 0 to 32767
B+2 Derivative time TD (0.000 to 32.767 min.)
B+3 Gap (dead-band) GP (0.00 to 10.00 %)
B+4 Auto mode initial set value ISV (0.00 to 100.00 %)
B+5 Input filter constant FT (0.000 to 0.999)
B+6 ASV differential limit DSV (0.00 to 100.00 %/∆t)
Data range: 0 to 32767
Data range: 0 to 1000
Data range: 0 to 10000
Data range: 0 to 999
Data range: 0 to 10000
B+7 MMV differential limit DMMV (0.00 to 100.00 %/∆t) Data range: 0 to 10000
Basic Hardware and Function 221
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
B+8 Initial status STS
F
C
8
4
0
Initial operation mode
00 : Manual mode
01 : Auto mode
10 : Cascade mode
11 : (Reserve)
Direct / reverse selection
0 : Direct
1 : Reverse
B+9 MV upper limit MH (-25.00 to 125.00 %)
B+10 MV lower limit ML (-25.00 to 125.00 %)
B+11 MV differential limit DMV (0.00 to 100.00 %/∆t)
B+12 Control interval setting n (1 to 32767 times)
Data range: -2500 to 12500
Data range: -2500 to 12500
Data range: 0 to 10000
Data range: 1 to 32767
Executes PID every n scan. Therefore, control interval ∆t = n × constant scan interval
(It is treated as n = 1 when n ≤ 0)
C
C+1
:
Manipulation value MV (-25.00 to 125.00 %)
Internal work area
Data range: -2500 to 12500
C+9
Operation
1. When the instruction input is OFF:
Initializes the PID3 instruction.
Operation mode is set as specified by B+8.
Auto mode SV is set as specified by B+4.
Manual mode MV is set as current MV.
Internal calculation data is initialized.
MV remains unchanged.
A+5 bit 0, 1 ← B+8 bit 0, 1
ASV ← ISV
MMV ← MV
2. When the instruction input is ON:
Executes PID calculation every n scan which is specified by B+12. The following operation modes are
available according to the setting of A+5.
•
Auto mode
This is a normal PID control mode with ASV as set value.
Set value differential limit DSV, manipulation value upper/lower limit MH/ML and differential limit DMV
are effective.
Bump-less changing from auto mode to manual mode is available. (Manual mode manipulation value
MMV is over-written by current MV automatically. MMV ← MV)
222 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
•
•
Manual mode
In this mode, the manipulation value MV can be directly controlled by the input value of MMV.
MV differential limit for manual mode DMMV is effective. MH/ML and DMV are not effective.
When mode is changed from manual to auto or cascade, the operation is started from the current MV.
Cascade mode
This is a mode for PID cascade connection. PID is executed with CSV as set value.
Different from the auto mode, set value differential limit is not effective. Manipulation value upper/lower
limit MH/ML and differential limit DMV are effective.
Bump-less changing from cascade mode to manual mode is available. (Manual mode manipulation
value MMV is over-written by current MV automatically. MMV ← MV)
And, bump-less changing from cascade mode to auto mode is available. (Auto mode set value ASV is
over-written by current CSV automatically. ASV ← CSV)
•
MV tracking
This function is available in auto and cascade modes. When the tracking designation (A+5 bit 2) is ON,
tracking input TMV is directly output as MV.
Manipulation value upper/lower limit MH/ML is effective, but differential limit DMV is not effective.
When the tracking designation is changed to OFF, the operation is started from the current MV.
Note
•
PID3 instruction is only usable on the main-program.
•
PID3 instruction must be used under the constant scan mode. The constant scan interval can be selected
in the range of 10 to 200 ms, 10 ms increments.
•
The data handled by the PID3 instruction are % units. Therefore, process input value PVC, manipulation
value MV, etc., should be converted to % units (scaling), before and/or after the PID3 instruction. For this
purpose, the function generator instruction (FUN165 FG) is convenient.
Basic Hardware and Function 223
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 160
UL
Upper limit
Expression
Input −[ A UL B → C ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, the following operation is executed. (Upper limit for A by B)
If A ≤ B, then C = A.
If A > B, then C = B.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF No operation
ON
Execution: not limited (A ≤ B)
Execution: limited (A > B)
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Operation data
B Upper limit
C Destination
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
When R030 is ON, the upper limit operation is executed for the data of RW018 by the data of
D1200, and the result is stored in RW021.
C
(RW021)
Upper limit B (D1200)
A (RW018)
When RW018 is 3000 and D1200 is 4000, 3000 is stored in RW021 and R0040 is OFF.
When RW018 is 4500 and D1200 is 4000, the limit value 4000 is stored in RW021 and R0040
is ON.
Note
• This instruction deals with the data as signed integer (-32768 to 32767).
224 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 161
LL
Lower limit
Expression
Input −[ A LL B → C ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, the following operation is executed. (Lower limit for A by B)
If A ≥ B, then C = A.
If A < B, then C = B.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF No operation
ON
Execution: not limited (A ≥ B)
Execution: limited (A < B)
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Operation data
B Lower limit
C Destination
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
When R031 is ON, the lower limit operation is executed for the data of RW019 by the data of
D1220, and the result is stored in RW022.
C
(RW022)
A (RW019)
Lower limit B (D1220)
When RW019 is -1000 and D1220 is -1800, -1000 is stored in RW022 and R0041 is OFF.
When RW019 is 800 and D1220 is 1200, the limit value 1200 is stored in RW022 and R0041
is ON.
Note
• This instruction deals with the data as signed integer (-32768 to 32767).
Basic Hardware and Function 225
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 162
MAX
Maximum value
Expression
Input −[ A MAX (n) B ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, this instruction searches for the maximum value from the table of sizen
words starting with A, and stores the maximum value in B and the pointer indicating the position of
the maximum value in B+1. The allowable range of the table sizen is 1 to 64.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
OFF No execution
ON
Execution
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
1 - 64
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
√
I
J
K
A Start of table
n Table size
B Result
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
When R010 is ON, the maximum value is found from the register table D0200 to D0209 (10
words), and the maximum value is stored in D0500 and the pointer is stored in D0501.
Pointer
D0200
D0201
D0202
D0203
D0204
D0205
D0206
D0207
D0208
D0209
100
10000
-1000
10
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
200
-300
20000
-30
D0500
D0501
20000
7
(Maximum value)
(Pointer)
20
Note
• This instruction deals with the data as signed integer (-32768 to 32767).
• If there are two or more maximum value in the table, the lowest pointer is stored.
• If Index register K is used as operand B, the pointer data is discarded.
226 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 163
MIN
Minimum value
Expression
Input −[ A MIN (n) B ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, this instruction searches for the minimum value from the table of sizen
words starting with A, and stores the minimum value in B and the pointer indicating the position of
the minimum value in B+1. The allowable range of the table sizen is 1 to 64.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
OFF No execution
ON
Execution
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
1 - 64
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
√
I
J
K
A Start of table
n Table size
B Result
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
When R011 is ON, the minimum value is found from the register table D0200 to D0209 (10
words), and the minimum value is stored in D0510 and the pointer is stored in D0511.
Pointer
D0200
D0201
D0202
D0203
D0204
D0205
D0206
D0207
D0208
D0209
100
10000
-1000
10
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
D0510
D0511
-1000
2
(Minimum value)
(Pointer)
0
200
-300
20000
-30
20
Note
• This instruction deals with the data as signed integer (-32768 to 32767).
• If there are two or more minimum value in the table, the lowest pointer is stored.
• If Index register K is used as operand B, the pointer data is discarded.
Basic Hardware and Function 227
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 164
AVE
Average value
Expression
Input −[ A AVE (n) B ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, this instruction calculates the average value of the data stored in then
registers starting with A, and stores the average value in B. The allowable range of the table sizen
is 1 to 64.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
OFF No execution
ON
Execution
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
1 - 64
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
√
I
J
K
A Start of table
n Table size
B Result
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
When R012 is ON, the average value of the data stored in the register table D0200 to D0209
(10 words), and the average value is stored in D0520.
D0200
D0201
D0202
D0203
D0204
D0205
D0206
D0207
D0208
D0209
100
10000
-1000
10
0
D0520
2900
(Average value)
200
-300
20000
-30
20
228 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 165
FG
Function generator
Expression
Input −[ A FG (n) B → C ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, this instruction finds the function value f(x) for A as x, and stores it in C. The
function f(x) is defined by the parameters stored in 2 × n registers starting with B.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
OFF No execution
ON
Execution
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A
Input value x
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
1 - 32
n Parameter size
B Start of
parameters
C Function value
f(x)
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
When R010 is ON, the FG instruction finds the function value f(x) for x = XW004, and stores
the result in D0100.
The function f(x) is defined by 2 × 4 = 8 parameters stored in D0600 to D0607. In this example,
these parameters are set at the first scan.
Basic Hardware and Function 229
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
Parameter table
4 registers for x parameters and subsequent 4 registers for corresponding f(x) parameters
y
(x4,y4)
y = f(x)
1800
D0600
D0601
D0602
D0603
D0604
D0605
D0606
D0607
-2000 x1
-100 x2
100 x3
2000 x4
-1800 y1
-300 y2
300 y3
300
(x3,y3)
100
-2000
-100
2000
x
(x2,y2)
-300
1800 y4
-1800
(x1,y1)
The FG instruction interpolators f(x) value for x based on the n parameters of (xi,yi).
For example, if XW04 is 1500 (x = 1500), the result 1405 (f(x) = 1405) is stored in D0100.
y
1800
1405
300
-2000
-100
100
-300
2000
1500
x
-1800
Note
• The order of the x parameters should be x1 ≤ x2 ≤ ... ≤ xi ≤ ... ≤ xn. In the above example, the
data of D0600 to D0603 should be D0600 ≤ D0601 ≤ D0602 ≤ D0603.
• If x is smaller than x1, y1 is given as f(x). In this example, D0604 data (-1800) is stored in
D0100 if XW04 is smaller than D0600 (-2000).
• If x is greater than xn, yn is given as f(x). In this example, D0607 data (1800) is stored in
D0100 if XW04 is greater than D0603 (2000).
• The valid data range is -32768 to 32767.
230 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 180
ABS
Absolute value
Expression
Input −[ A ABS B ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, this instruction finds the absolute value of operand A, and stores it in B.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
OFF No execution
ON
Execution
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Source
B Destination
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
When X006 is ON, the absolute value of RW38 is stored in D0121.
For example, if RW38 is -12000, the absolute value 12000 is stored in D0121.
D0121
32767
12000
-32767
-12000
0
32767
RW38
Note
• The data range of A is -32768 to 32767. If the data of A is -32768, 32767 is stored in B.
Basic Hardware and Function 231
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 182
NEG
2’s complement
Expression
Input −[ A NEG B ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, this instruction finds the 2’s complement value of A, and stores it in B.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
OFF No execution
ON
Execution
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Source
B Destination
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
When X007 is ON, the 2’s complement value (sign inverted data) of RW39 is stored in D0122.
For example, if RW38 is 4660, the 2’s complement value -4660 is stored in D0122.
2’s complement data is calculated as follows.
F
E
D
C
B
A
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RW39 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
Bit inverse
(4660)
(-4661)
(-4660)
1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1
+ 1
D0122 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0
Note
• The data range of A is -32768 to 32767. If the data of A is -32768, the same data -32768 is
stored in B.
232 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 183
DNEG Double-word 2’s complement
Expression
Input −[ A+1⋅A DNEG B+1⋅B ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, this instruction finds the 2’s complement value of double-word data A+1⋅A,
and stores it in B+1⋅B.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
OFF No execution
ON
Execution
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Source
B Destination
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
When X007 is ON, the 2’s complement value (sign inverted data) of double-word register
RW41⋅RW40 is stored in double-word register D0151⋅D0150.
For example, if RW41⋅RW40 is -1234567890, the 2’s complement value 1234567890 is stored
in D0151⋅D0150.
Note
• The data range of A+1⋅A is -2147483648 to 2147483647. If the data of A+1⋅A is -2147483648,
the same data -2147483648 is stored in B+1⋅B.
Basic Hardware and Function 233
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 185
7SEG
7 segment decode
Expression
Input −[ A 7SEG B ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, this instruction converts the lower 4 bits data ofA into the 7 segment code,
and stores it in B. The 7 segment code is normally used for a numeric display LED.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
OFF No execution
ON
Execution
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Source
B Destination
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
When X000 is ON, the lower 4 bits data of RW15 is converted into the 7 segment code, and
the result is stored in lower 8 bits of RW10. 0 is stored in upper 8 bits of RW10.
For example, if RW15 is H0009, the corresponding 7 segment code H006F is stored in RW10.
F
E
D
C
B
A
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RW15 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 (H0009)
Upper 12 bits are ignored
7 segment decode
RW10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 (H006F)
0 is stored in upper 8 bits
The 7 segment code conversion table is shown on the next page.
234 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
Operand A (lower 4 bits)
7 segment LED
composition
Operand B (lower 8 bits)
B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0
Display
Hex
Binary
0000
0001
0010
0011
0100
0101
0110
0111
1000
1001
1010
1011
1100
1101
1110
1111
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
2
3
B0
4
5
B5
B1
B6
6
7
B4
B2
8
9
B3
A
B
C
D
E
F
Basic Hardware and Function 235
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 186
ASC
ASCII conversion
Expression
Input −[ A ASC B ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, this instruction converts the alphanumeric characters into the ASCII codes,
and stores them in the register table starting with B. (16 characters maximum)
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
OFF No execution
ON
Execution
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Characters
B Start of
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
destination
Example
When R030 is ON, the characters ‘ABCDEFGHIJKLMN’ is converted into the ASCII codes, and
the result is stored in 8 registers starting with lower 8 bits (byte) of D0200 (D0200 to D0207).
High
Low
F
8
7
0
D0200 H42 (B)
D0201 H44 (D)
D0202 H46 (F)
D0203 H48 (H)
D0204 H4A (J)
D0205 H4C (L)
D0206 H4E (N)
D0207
H41 (A)
H43 (C)
H45 (E)
H47 (G)
H49 (I)
H4B (K)
H4D (M)
Previous data is remained
Note
• Only the number of bytes converted are stored. The rest are not changed. In the above
example, 14 characters are converted into 14 bytes of ASCII code, and these ASCII codes are
stored in 7 registers (D0200 to D0206). The data of D0207 remains unchanged.
236 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 188
BIN
Binary conversion
Expression
Input −[ A BIN B ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, this instruction converts the 4 digits of BCD data ofA into binary, and stores
in B. If any digit of A contains non-BCD code (other than H0 through H9), the conversion is not
executed and the instruction error flag (ERF = S051) is set to ON.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
ERF
−
−
Set
OFF No execution
ON
Normal execution
BCD data error
OFF
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Source (BCD)
H0000 -
H9999
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
B Destination
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
(Binary)
Example
When R017 is ON, the BCD data of RW28 is converted into binary data, and the result is
stored in D0127.
For example, if RW28 is H1234, the binary data 1234 is stored in D0127.
RW28
H1234
BCD to Binary
D0127
1234
Note
• If any digit of operand A contains non-BCD data, e.g. H13A6, the conversion is not executed
and the instruction error flag (ERF = S051) is set to ON.
Basic Hardware and Function 237
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 190
BCD
BCD conversion
Expression
Input −[ A BCD B ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, this instruction converts the binary data of A into BCD, and stores in B. If the
data of A is not in the range of 0 to 9999, the conversion is not executed and the instruction error
flag (ERF = S051) is set to ON.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
ERF
−
−
Set
OFF No execution
ON
Normal execution
Binary data error
OFF
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
0 - 9999
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
√
I
√
J
√
K
√
A Source
(Binary)
√
√
√
√
√
√
B Destination
(BCD)
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Example
When R019 is ON, the data of D0211 is converted into 4-digit BCD, and the result is stored in
RW22.
For example, if D0211 is 5432, the BCD data H5432 is stored in RW22.
D0211
5432
Binary to BCD
RW22
H5432
Note
• If the data of A is smaller than 0 or greater than 9999, the conversion is not executed and the
instruction error flag (ERF = S051) is set to ON.
238 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 235
I/O
Direct I/O
Expression
Input −[ I/O (n) A ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, this instruction immediately updates the external input (XW) and output
(YW) registers which are in the range of n registers starting with A.
• For XW register ... reads the data from corresponding input circuit
• For YW register ... writes the data into corresponding output circuit
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
OFF No execution
ON
Execution
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
1 - 32
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
n Register size
A Start of
√
√
registers
Example
When R010 is ON, the 4 registers starting with XW00 (XW00 to YW03) are updated
immediately.
XW00
XW01
YW02
YW03
Input
circuit
Output
circuit
Basic Hardware and Function 239
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
Note
• In the T1-16S, the following register/device range is only effective for this Direct I/O instruction.
Input on basic unit
X000 - X007
Output on basic unit
Y020 - Y027
I/O module
Not effective
• The Direct I/O instruction can be programmed in the main program and in the interrupt program.
If this instruction is programmed in both, the instruction in the main program should be executed
in interrupt disable state. Refer to EI (FUN 140) and DI (FUN 141) instructions.
240 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 236
XFER
Expanded data transfer
Expression
Input −[ A XFER B → C ]− Output
Function
When the input is ON, data block transfer is performed between the source which is indirectly
designated by A and A+1 and the destination which is indirectly designated by C and C+1. The
transfer size (number of words) is designated by B.
The transfer size is 1 to 256 words. (except for writing into EEPROM)
Data transfer between the following objects are available.
• CPU register (RW or D) ↔ EEPROM (D register)
• CPU register (RW or D) ↔ T1S RS-485 port (T1S only)
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
ERF
−
−
Set
OFF No execution
ON
Normal execution
When error is occurred (see Note)
ON
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Source
parameter
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
B Transfer size
C Destination
parameter
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Parameters
Source parameter
Type
Transfer size and status
Transfer size
Destination parameter
Type
A
B
C
A+1
Leading address
B+1 Status flag for RS-485 port
B+2 (max. 2 words)
C+1
Leading address
Register type
RW register (RAM)
D register (RAM)
D register (EEPROM)
Type code
H0003
H0004
Leading address
Transfer size
1 to 256
0 to 255
0 to 4095
0 to 2047
1 to 256
H0020
1 to 32 (if destination)
1 to 256 (if source)
1 to 256
T1S RS-485 port
H0030
0 (fixed)
Basic Hardware and Function 241
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
CPU register ↔ built-in EEPROM
In the EEPROM, the D registers are divided into pages as follows.
T1-16S
D0000
Page 1
(32 words)
• Writing data into the EEPROM is
available within one page at a
time. (max. 32 words)
D0031
D0032
Page 2
(32 words)
• For data reading from the
EEPROM, there is no need to
consider the pages.
D0063
D2016
D2047
Page 64
(32 words)
Example
When R020 is changed from OFF to ON, 10 words of RAM data (D0700 to D0709) are written
into the EEPROM (D0016 to D0025).
D1000 (H0004) and D1001 (700) indicate the leading register of the source table (D0700 in
RAM). D1002 (10) indicates the transfer size (10 words = 10 registers). D1003 (H0020 = 32)
and D1004 (16) indicate the leading register of the destination table (D0016 in EEPROM).
Note
• The XFER instruction is not executed as error in the following cases. In these cases, the
instruction error flag (ERF = S051) is set to ON. If the ERF is set to ON once, it remains ON until
resetting to OFF by user program.
(1) When the number of words transferred exceeds limit.
(2) When the source/destination table of transfer is out of the valid range.
(3) When the transfer combination is invalid.
• The EEPROM has a life limit for data writing into an address. It is 100,000 times. Pay attention
not to exceed the limit. (EEPROM alarm flag = S007 is not updated by this instruction)
• Once data writing into the EEPROM is executed, EEPROM access (read/write) is prohibited for
the duration of 10 ms. Therefore, minimum 10 ms interval is necessary for data writing.
• The XFER instruction can be programmed in the main program and in the interrupt program.
If this instruction is programmed in both, the instruction in the main program should be executed
in interrupt disable state. Refer to EI (FUN 140) and DI (FUN 141) instructions.
242 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
CPU register ↔ T1S RS-485 port
<Receiving>
When the instruction input is ON, one set of message (from start character to the trailing code)
which is received by the RS-485 port is read from the receive buffer, and stored in the CPU
registers. The transfer size is fixed to 256 words. The execution status and the message length
(in bytes) are stored in the status flag.
The instruction input must be kept ON until the receiving operation is complete.
Example
Source designation
H0030
Transfer size
00256 (fixed)
D0003 Execution status
D0004 Message length
Destination designation
D0000
D0001
D0002
D0005
D0006
H0004
00100
00000
T1S RS-485 port
D0100 (CPU register)
When R0000 is ON, one set of received message is read and stored in D0100 and after.
Execution status:
H0000 ... Normal complete
H0001 ... Communication error (parity error, framing error)
H0002 ... Message length over (more than 512 bytes)
H0003 ... Receive buffer over flow
H0004 ... Receive time-out (from start character to the trailing code)
Baudrate
Time-out setting
300, 600, 1200 bps 30 seconds
2400 bps
4800 bps
9600 bps
19200 bps
15 seconds
7 seconds
3 seconds
1.5 seconds
Message length: 0 .............. No receive message
1 to 512 ... Message length in bytes
Note
• The XFER instruction is not executed as error in the following cases. In these cases, the
instruction error flag (ERF = S051) is set to ON. If the ERF is set to ON once, it remains ON until
resetting to OFF by user program.
(1) The leading address for the RS-485 port designation is other than 0.
(2) Transfer size is other than 256.
(3) Mode setting of the RS-485 port is not the free ASCII mode.
(4) This instruction is programmed in the sub-program #1.
Basic Hardware and Function 243
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
<Transmitting>
When the instruction input is ON, one set of message which is stored in the source table (from
start character to the trailing code) is transmitted through the RS-485 port. The execution
status is stored in the status flag.
The instruction input must be kept ON until the transmitting operation is complete.
Example
Source designation
H00 H04
Transfer size
00012
D0013 Execution status
Destination designation
H00 H30
00000
D0010
D0011
D0012
D0015
D0016
00500
D0500 (CPU register)
T1S RS-485 port
When R0001 is ON, one set of message (ended by the trailing code) stored in the range of
D0500 to D0511 (12 words) is transmitted through the RS-485 port.
Execution status:
H0000 ... Normal complete
H0001 ... During transmitting the message
H0002 ... Communication busy
H0003 ... During the reset operation
H0004 ... Send time-out (from start character to the trailing code)
H0005 ... Send message length error (no trailing code in the source table)
Baudrate
Time-out setting
300, 600, 1200 bps 30 seconds
2400 bps
4800 bps
9600 bps
19200 bps
15 seconds
7 seconds
3 seconds
1.5 seconds
Note
• The XFER instruction is not executed as error in the following cases. In these cases, the
instruction error flag (ERF = S051) is set to ON. If the ERF is set to ON once, it remains ON until
resetting to OFF by user program.
(1) The leading address for the RS-485 port designation is other than 0.
(2) Transfer size is out of the range of 1 to 256.
(3) Mode setting of the RS-485 port is not the free ASCII mode.
(4) This instruction is programmed in the sub-program #1.
244 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
FUN 236
XFER
Expanded data transfer (Inverter connection mode)
Expression
Input −[ A XFER B → C ]− Output
Function
This function is provided to control Toshiba Inverters VF-A7/G7/S9 connected on the RS-485 line.
When the RS-485 port operation mode is set to the Inverter mode (SW56 = 3), the T1-16S can
perform the following functions for up to 63 Inverters.
(1) Cyclically scans the Inverters and sends/receives the following data to/from each Inverter.
• Send to Inverter: Frequency reference write and Operation command write (Run, Stop, etc.)
• Receive from Inverter: Operating frequency monitor and Output terminal status monitor
(2) Cyclically scans the Inverters and receives the following data from each Inverter.
• Receive from Inverter: Operating frequency monitor and Output terminal status monitor
(3) Sends a specified Read command to a specified Inverter and stores the response data.
(4) Sends a specified Write command with the command data to a specified Inverter.
(5) Sends a specified Write command with the command data to all the connected inverters as
broadcast.
Execution condition
Input
Operation
Output
OFF
ON
ERF
−
−
Set
OFF No execution
ON
Normal execution
When error is occurred (see Note)
ON
Operand
Name
Device
Register
Constant Index
X
Y
R
S
T. C. XW YW RW SW T
C
D
I
J
K
A Data table
B Inverter No.
C RS-485 port
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Parameters
Data table designation
Register type code
Leading address
Parameter and status
Inverter number
Operation mode
Execution status
RS-485 port designation
Fixed to H0030
C+1 Fixed to 0
A
A+1
B
B+1
B+2
C
B+3 Communication error code
B+4
B+5
B+6
B+7
Inverter communication
status map
(each bit shows each
Inverter status)
Data table designation (A, A+1):
Register
RW register
D register
Type code (A)
Leading address (A+1)
0 to 255
H0003
H0004
0 to 4095
Basic Hardware and Function 245
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
Operation mode designation (B+1):
B+1
0
Operation mode
Data exchange mode
(Mode 0)
Monitor mode
(Mode 1)
Read command mode
(Mode 2)
Write command mode
(Mode 3)
Description
Cyclically scans the connected Inverters (Control & Monitor)
(Inverter command: P+FA01&FA00 and R+FD00&FE07)
Cyclically scans the connected Inverters (Monitor only)
(Inverter command: R+FD00&FE07)
Sends a read command to a specified Inverter
(Inverter command: R+ User designation)
Sends a write command to a specified Inverter
(Inverter command: P+ User designation)
Sends a write command to all the connected Inverters as broadcast
(Inverter command: P+ User designation)
1
2
3
4
Broadcast mode
(Mode 4)
Inverter number (B):
For the operation mode 0 and 1:
It specifies the maximum Inverter number. For example, if it is 5, the T1-16S scans from #0
through #5 Inverters and repeats. Setting range is 0 to 63.
For the operation mode 2 and 3:
It specifies the target Inverter number for sending commands. Setting range is 0 to 63.
For the operation mode 4:
This setting is ignored. The broadcast address (HFF) is used as Inverter number.
Execution status (B+2):
F
E
D
C
B
A
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
B+2
Shows the scan count.
(0 → 1 → 2 → ... → 32767 → 0 → 1 ... )
Comes 1 when the RS-485 port is busy. (No execution)
Communication error code (B+3):
The communication error code responded from the Inverter is shown here. If 2 or more Inverters are error,
the smallest Inverter number's error is stored. Refer to Inverter's manual for the error code.
B+3
Meaning
0
No error (Normal)
Response time-out (No answer)
Others Inverter error response (Refer to Inverter's manual)
Inverter communication status map (B+4 to B+7):
This 4-word table shows the communication status map of each Inverter. (1: Normal / 0: Error or No
answer)
F
E
D
C
B
A
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
B+4 15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
B+5 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
B+6 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32
B+7 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48
246 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
< Data exchange mode (Mode 0) >
When the instruction input comes ON with the operand B+1 is 0, the Data exchange mode
(mode 0) is selected. In this mode, the T1-16S sends the following commands to the Inverters
starting from #0 through the Inverter number specified by the operand B, and repeats.
#0 Frequency reference write (FA01)
#0 Operation command write (FA00)
#1 Frequency reference write (FA01)
#1 Operation command write (FA00)
:
#n Frequency reference write (FA01)
#n Operation command write (FA00)
Scan
#0 Operating frequency monitor (FD00)
#0 Output terminal status monitor (FE07)
#1 Operating frequency monitor (FD00)
#1 Output terminal status monitor (FE07)
:
#n Operating frequency monitor (FD00)
#n Output terminal status monitor (FE07)
The maximum Inverter number #n is specified by the operand B.
The scan execution status and the Inverter communication status are stored in the operand
B+2 to B+7.
The command data table is specified by the operand A and A+1.
When the instruction input is reset to OFF, the operation is stopped after receiving the
response from the Inverter currently communicating.
Example
Data table designation
Parameter & status
RS-485 port
H0030 (fixed)
0 (fixed)
D1000
D1001
4
2000
RW200
RW201
5
D1010
D1011
0 (mode 0)
RW202 Execution status
RW203 Comm error code
RW204
RW205 Inverter comms
RW206
RW207
status map
When the data for each operand are set as above, the following operation condition is specified.
• RW200=5 ⇒ The max Inverter number is 5. Therefore T1-16S scans from #0 through #5 Inverters.
• D1000=4 & D1001=2000 ⇒ D2000 is specified as the data table starting address.
Basic Hardware and Function 247
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
Data table:
Register
Data contents
Signal direction
← Read
D2000 #0 Operating frequency
D2001 #0 Output terminal status
D2002 #0 Frequency reference
D2003 #0 Operation command
D2004 #1 Operating frequency
D2005 #1 Output terminal status
D2006 #1 Frequency reference
D2007 #1 Operation command
← Read
→ Write
→ Write
← Read
← Read
→ Write
→ Write
D2020 #5 Operating frequency
D2021 #5 Output terminal status
D2022 #5 Frequency reference
D2023 #5 Operation command
← Read
← Read
→ Write
→ Write
• The data format for the operating frequency and the frequency reference registers are 0.01 Hz units.
For example, if it is 60 Hz, the corresponding register data is 6000.
• For the data format of the output terminal status register, refer to the Monitor mode (mode 1).
• The bit assignment of the operation command register is as follows. For details, refer to your
Inverter manual.
F
E
D
C
B
A
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Programmed speed selection
0000 = None
0001 = Speed 1
0010 = Speed 2
:
1111 = Speed 15
PI operation (0 = Normal / 1 = Off)
DC braking (0 = Off / 1 = On)
Jog operation (0 = off / 1 = On)
F/R selection (0 = Forward / 1 = Reverse)
Run/Stop (0 = Stop / 1 = Run)
Free run (0 = Normal / 1 = Free run)
Emergency stop (0 = Normal / 1 = EMS)
Reset command (0 = Normal / 1 = Reset)
Frequency enable (0 = Disable / 1 = Enable)
Command enable (0 = Disable / 1 = Enable)
Example operation:
To operate the #0 Inverter at 30 Hz forward rotation, write the value 3000 in D2002 and HC400 in
D2003. (HC400 = Bits F, E, A are 1, and others are 0)
The current operating frequency and the output terminal status of the #0 Inverter are stored in D2000
and D2001 respectively.
248 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
< Monitor mode (Mode 1) >
When the instruction input comes ON with the operand B+1 is 1, the Monitor mode (mode 1) is
selected.
In this mode, the T1-16S sends the following Read commands to the Inverters starting from #0
through the Inverter number specified by the operand B, and repeats.
#0 Operating frequency monitor (FD00)
#0 Output terminal status monitor (FE07)
#1 Operating frequency monitor (FD00)
#1 Output terminal status monitor (FE07)
:
Scan
#n Operating frequency monitor (FD00)
#n Output terminal status monitor (FE07)
The maximum Inverter number #n is specified by the operand B.
The scan execution status and the Inverter communication status are stored in the operand
B+2 to B+7.
The monitor data table is specified by the operand A and A+1.
When the instruction input is reset to OFF, the operation is stopped after receiving the
response from the Inverter currently communicating.
Example
Data table designation
Parameter & status
19
RS-485 port
H0030 (fixed)
0 (fixed)
D1000
D1001
3
100
RW200
RW201
D1010
D1011
1 (mode 1)
RW202 Execution status
RW203 Comm error code
RW204
RW205 Inverter comms
RW206
RW207
status map
When the data for each operand are set as above, the following operation condition is specified.
• RW200=19 ⇒ The max Inverter number is 19. Therefore T1-16S scans from #0 through #19 Inverters.
• D1000=3 & D1001=100 ⇒ RW100 is specified as the data table starting address.
Basic Hardware and Function 249
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
Data table:
Register
Data contents
Signal direction
← Read
← Read
RW100 #0 Operating frequency
RW101 #0 Output terminal status
RW102
RW103
No use
No use
RW104 #1 Operating frequency
RW105 #1 Output terminal status
← Read
← Read
RW106
RW107
No use
No use
RW176 #19 Operating frequency
RW177 #19 Output terminal status
← Read
← Read
RW178
RW179
No use
No use
• The data format for the operating frequency register is 0.01 Hz units. For example, if it is 60 Hz, the
corresponding register data is 6000.
• The bit assignment of the output terminal status register is as follows. For details, refer to your
Inverter manual.
F
E
D
C
B
A
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
OUT1 (f130)
OUT2 (f131)
FL (f132)
R1 (f133)
R2 (f134)
OUT3 (f135)
OUT4 (f136)
ALM0
ALM1
ALM2
ALM3
Example operation:
The current operating frequency and the output terminal status of the #0 Inverter are stored in RW100
and RW101 respectively.
If the #0 Inverter is operating at 55 Hz, the data 5500 is stored in RW100. If the OUT2 terminal of the
#0 Inverter is ON, the bit 1 of RW101 (R1011) becomes 1.
250 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
< Read command mode (Mode 2) >
When the instruction input comes ON with the operand B+1 is 2, the Read command mode
(mode 2) is selected. In this mode, the T1-16S sends the user specified Read command to the
Inverter specified by the operand B, and repeats.
Sends the specified command to #n Inverter
Repeat
Receives the response and stores the data into the register
The target Inverter number #n is specified by the operand B.
The scan execution status and the Inverter communication status are stored in the operand
B+2 to B+7.
The command setting register and the response data storing register is indirectly specified by
the operand A and A+1.
When the instruction input is reset to OFF, the operation is stopped after receiving the
response from the Inverter.
Example
Data table designation
Parameter & status
RS-485 port
H0030 (fixed)
0 (fixed)
D1000
D1001
4
3000
RW200
RW201
3
D1010
D1011
2 (mode 2)
RW202 Execution status
RW203 Comm error code
RW204
RW205 Inverter comms
RW206
RW207
status map
When the data for each operand are set as above, the following operation condition is specified.
• RW200=3 ⇒ The target Inverter number is 3. Therefore T1-16S communicates with #3 Inverter.
• D1000=4 & D1001=3000 ⇒ D3000 is specified as the command setting register and D3001 is specified
as the response data storing register.
Data table:
Register
Data contents
Signal direction
D3000 Command code
D3001 Response data
← Read
Example operation:
For example, to read the output current from the #3 Inverter, set the command code HFE03 into
D3000. Then the response data is stored in D3001. If the response data is 1915, it means 19.15 %.
For the command code and the data format of the response, refer to your Inverter manual.
Basic Hardware and Function 251
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
< Write command mode (Mode 3) >
When the instruction input comes ON with the operand B+1 is 3, the Write command mode
(mode 3) is selected. In this mode, the T1-16S sends the user specified Write command to the
Inverter specified by the operand B, and repeats.
Sends the specified command with command data to #n Inverter
Repeat
Checks the acknowledge
The target Inverter number #n is specified by the operand B.
The scan execution status and the Inverter communication status are stored in the operand
B+2 to B+7.
The command code and the command data setting registers are indirectly specified by the
operand A and A+1.
When the instruction input is reset to OFF, the operation is stopped after receiving the
response from the Inverter.
Example
Data table designation
Parameter & status
RS-485 port
H0030 (fixed)
0 (fixed)
D1000
D1001
4
3010
RW200
RW201
5
D1010
D1011
3 (mode 3)
RW202 Execution status
RW203 Comm error code
RW204
RW205 Inverter comms
RW206
RW207
status map
When the data for each operand are set as above, the following operation condition is specified.
• RW200=5 ⇒ The target Inverter number is 5. Therefore T1-16S communicates with #5 Inverter.
• D1000=4 & D1001=3010 ⇒ D3010 is specified as the command code setting register and D3011 is
specified as the command data setting register.
Data table:
Register
Data contents
Signal direction
D3010 Command code
D3011 Command data
→ Write
Example operation:
For example, to write the acceleration time parameter (10 seconds) to the #5 Inverter, set the
command code H0009 into D3010 and the value 100 into D3011.
For the command code and the command data format, refer to your Inverter manual.
252 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
< Broadcast mode (Mode 4) >
When the instruction input comes ON with the operand B+1 is 4, the Broadcast mode (mode 4)
is selected. In this mode, the T1-16S sends the user specified Write command to all the
Inverters as broadcast.
This mode is useful to send Run/Stop command to all the Inverter at the same time.
Sends the specified command with command data to all Inverters (broadcast)
Repeat
Checks the acknowledge from #0 Inverter
The Inverter number specified by the operand B is ignored.
The scan execution status and the Inverter communication status are stored in the operand
B+2 to B+7. (only #0 Inverter responds)
The command code and the command data setting registers are indirectly specified by the
operand A and A+1.
When the instruction input is reset to OFF, the operation is stopped after receiving the
response from the Inverter.
Example
Data table designation
Parameter & status
(any 0 to 63)
RS-485 port
H0030 (fixed)
0 (fixed)
D1000
D1001
4
3020
RW200
RW201
D1010
D1011
4 (mode 4)
RW202 Execution status
RW203 Comm error code
RW204
RW205 Inverter comms
RW206
RW207
status map
When the data for each operand are set as above, the following operation condition is specified.
• D1000=4 & D1001=3020 ⇒ D3020 is specified as the command code setting register and D3021 is
specified as the command data setting register.
Data table:
Register
Data contents
Signal direction
D3020 Command code
D3021 Command data
→ Write
Example operation:
For example, to send the Run forward command to all the Inverters, set the command code HFA00
into D3020 and the value HC400 into D3021.
For the command code and the command data format, refer to your Inverter manual.
Basic Hardware and Function 253
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
7. Instructions
< Note >
(1) The XFER instruction is not executed as error in the following cases. In these cases, the instruction error
flag (ERF = S051) is set to ON. If the ERF is set to ON once, it remains ON until resetting to OFF by
user program.
• The RS-485 port designation is other than H0030 and 0.
• The Inverter number designation is other than 0 to 63.
• Operation mode setting for RS-485 port is other than the Inverter connection mode.
(2) This XFER instruction must be programmed in the Main program.
(3) During the instruction input is ON, the data contents in the data table specified by A can be changed.
However, parameters specified by B cannot be changed.
(4) In the Data exchange mode (mode 0) and the Monitor mode (mode 1), the T1-16S scans from #0 to the
specified number. Therefore the Inverter number should be consecutive starting with 0.
If an Inverter is disconnected from the network, the T1-16S checks its existence periodically. When you
turn off power to an Inverter for maintenance purpose and turn on again, it is recommended to reset the
instruction input to re-configure the network.
254 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
Section 8
Special I/O Functions
8.1 Special I/O function overview, 256
8.2 Variable input filter constant, 260
8.3 High speed counter, 261
8.4 Interrupt input function, 268
8.5 Analog setting function, 270
8.6 Pulse output function, 271
8.7 PWM output function, 273
Basic Hardware and Function 255
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
8. Special I/O Functions
8.1 Special I/O function overview
The T1-16S supports the special I/O functions as listed below.
Function name
Variable input filter
constant
Function summary
Input filter constant (ON/OFF delay time) can be set SW16 setting
by user program. The setting range is 0 to 15ms
(1ms units). Default value is 10ms. This function is
applied for X000 to X007 (8 points as a block).
Remarks
is necessary to
use this
function. (Note)
High
speed
counter
Single phase Counts the number of pulses of single phase pulse
up-counter train. 2 channels of pulse input are available. The
Only one
among these 4
countable pulse rate is up to 5KHz for each channel. functions can
be selected.
SW16 is used
to select the
function.
Channel 1 … X000 count input, X002 reset input
Channel 2 … X001 count input, X003 reset input
Single phase Counts the number of pulses in a specified sampling
speed-
counter
time. The sampling time setting is 10 to 1000ms
(10ms units). 2 channels of pulse input are available.
The countable pulse rate is up to 5KHz for each
channel.
(Note)
Channel 1 … X000 count input
Channel 2 … X001 count input
Quadrature Counts the 2-phase pulses whose phases are shifted
bi-pulse
counter
90° each other. Counts up when phase A precedes,
and counts down when phase B precedes.
The countable pulse rate is up to 5KHz.
Phase A … X000
Phase B … X001
Reset … … X002
Interrupt input function Immediately activates the corresponding I/O interrupt
program when the interrupt input is changed from
OFF to ON (or ON to OFF). 2 points of interrupt input
are available.
X002 … Interrupt 1 (I/O interrupt program #3)
X003 … Interrupt 2 (I/O interrupt program #4)
Analog setting
function
The value of the analog setting adjuster is converted No function
into digital value (0 to 1000) and stored in the SW
register. 2 adjusters are provided on the T1-16S.
V0 … SW30
selection is
required.
V1 … SW31
Pulse output function Variable frequency pulse train can be output. The
available pulse rate is 50 to 5000Hz (1Hz units).
Y020 … CW or Pulse (PLS)
Either one
between these
2 functions
can be used.
SW26 is used
to select the
function.(Note)
Y021 … CCW or Direction (DIR)
PWM output function Variable duty cycle pulse train can be output. The
available ON duty setting is 0 to 100% (1% units).
Y020 … PWM output
256 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
8. Special I/O Functions
Mode setting for the special I/O functions
These functions, except the analog setting function, are selected by setting data into
SW16 and SW26 by user program. These registers work as mode setting registers for
the special I/O functions. The data setting for these registers, i.e. mode setting for the
special I/O functions, is effective only at the first scan.
Note) In the explanation below, HSC and INT mean the high speed counter and the
interrupt input functions respectively.
F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
SW16
0
0 0
0 0
Bit 0 < HSC and INT master flag >
0: No use
1: Use
Bit 1 < HSC / INT selection >
0: INT
1: HSC
Bits 2 and 3 < INT No.1 mode >
00: No use (Reserve)
01: Rising (OFF to ON)
10: Falling (ON to OFF)
11: No use (Reserve)
Bits 6 and 7 < INT No.2 mode >
00: No use (Reserve)
01: Rising (OFF to ON)
10: Falling (ON to OFF)
11: No use (Reserve)
Bits A and B < HSC mode >
00: Single phase up-counter
01: Single phase speed-counter
10: Quadrature bi-pulse counter
11: No use (Reserve)
Bits C and D < Enable flag for HSC / INT >
00: CH2 - disable, CH1 - disable
01: CH2 - disable, CH1 - enable
10: CH2 - enable, CH1 - disable
11: CH2 - enable, CH1 - enable
Bit F < Variable input filter constant >
0: No use (fixed to 10ms)
1: Use
Basic Hardware and Function 257
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
8. Special I/O Functions
Note) In the explanation below, P-OUT means the pulse output function.
F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SW26
Bit 0 < P-OUT and PWM master flag >
0: No use
1: Use
Bit 1 < P-OUT / PWM selection >
0: PWM
1: P-OUT
Bit 2 < PLS mode >
0: CW/CCW
1: Pulse/Direction (PLS/DIR)
P-OUT / PWM operation error flag
(These are not user setting items)
Bit D < PWM pulse width error >
0: Normal
1: Error
Bit E < PWM ON duty setting error >
0: Normal
1: Error
Bit F < Frequency setting error >
0: Normal
1: Error
258 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
8. Special I/O Functions
The table below summarizes the mode setting data of each function. In the table,
‘−’ means do not care.
SW16
Variable input filter constant
F
E
D C
B
A
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Use
1 0
0 0
0 0
− − − −
− − − −
− −
SW16
High speed counter
F
E
D C
B
A
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Single phase
up-counter
Channel 1 only
0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Channel 2 only
Both channels
Channel 1 only
Channel 2 only
Both channels
Single phase
speed-counter
Quadrature bi-pulse counter
SW16
Interrupt input function
F
E
D C
B
A
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Interrupt 1 only Rising (OFF to ON)
Falling (ON to OFF)
Interrupt 2 only Rising (OFF to ON)
Falling (ON to OFF)
0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1
0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1
0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1
0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1
0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Both interrupts No.1 = Rising, No.2 = Rising
1 and 2
No.1 = Rising, No.2 = Falling
No.1 = Falling, No.2 = Rising
No.1 = Falling, No.2 =
Falling
SW26
Pulse output function
F
E
D C
B
A
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
CW/CCW method
Pulse/Direction (PLS/DIR) method
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1
− − −
− − −
SW26
PWM output function
F
E
D C
B
A
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Use
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
− − −
For example, the following programs can be used to select the quadrature bi-pulse
counter.
or
(H0803)
Basic Hardware and Function 259
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
8. Special I/O Functions
8.2 Variable input filter constant
Function
The input filter constant (ON/OFF delay time) of the leading 8 points X000 to X007
can be specified by user program within the range of 0 to 15ms. The default is 10ms.
The setting value is recognized at the first scan. Therefore, it cannot be changed after
the second scan.
Related registers
SW16 Function selection. Refer to section 8.1.
SW17 Input filter constant value
F
E D C B A
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
No use (set to 0)
Setting value
0 to 15
Operation
Input signal
T
T
T
T
Internal logic
Scan cycle
X device
T: Input filter constant (0 to 15ms)
Sample program
This program sets the input filter constant to 3ms.
260 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
8. Special I/O Functions
8.3 High speed counter
8.3.1 Single phase up-counter
Function
When the count input is changed from OFF to ON, the count value is increased by 1.
When the count value reaches the set value, the count value is reset to 0, and I/O
interrupt program is activated (if the interrupt enable flag is ON). The count value is
reset to 0 when the reset input comes ON.
This counter operation is enabled while the soft-gate is ON. The count value is reset to
0 when the soft-gate is changed from ON to OFF.
The set value is set internally at the timing of the soft-gate changing from OFF to ON.
When the soft-gate is OFF, the count value can be changed by writing the data into
the set value register and setting the count preset flag to ON.
The count value range is H0000 to HFFFF (16-bit data).
Hardware condition
Count input (X000 and X001)
ON/OFF pulse width: 100µs or more (max. 5KHz)
Reset input (X002 and X003)
ON/OFF duration:
Related registers
SW16: Function selection. Refer to section 8.1.
Function Register/device
Count input
2ms or more
Remarks
Channel 1
Channel 2
X001
X000
X002
SW18
SW22
S240
S241
S243
(Note)
Reset input
Set value
Count value
Soft-gate
X003
SW20
SW23
S248
Data range: H0000 to HFFFF
Operation is enabled when ON
Interrupt is enabled when ON
Used to preset the counter value
Interrupt enable
Count preset
S249
S24B
Note) When both channels are used, X000 to X003 cannot be used as normal
input devices. However, if either one channel is used, these inputs for unused
channel can be used as normal input devices.
Interrupt assignment
Channel 1 … I/O interrupt program #1
Channel 2 … I/O interrupt program #2
Basic Hardware and Function 261
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
8. Special I/O Functions
Operation
Count input
Reset input
Soft-gate
Set value
Count value
Interrupt
Sample program
(H1003)
In this example, 4099 (H1003) is set in SW16. As a result, the single phase up-
counter (channel 1 only) is selected.
When R010 comes ON, the data 2000 is written into the set value register (SW18).
While R010 is ON, the soft-gate (S240) and the interrupt enable flag (S241) are set to
ON to enable the counter operation.
The counter works as a ring counter with the set value 2000. The count value is stored
in SW22.
When R010 is OFF and R011 comes ON, the count value is preset to the data of
D0100.
262 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
8. Special I/O Functions
8.3.2 Single phase speed-counter
Function
This function counts the number of changes of the count input from OFF to ON during
the every specified sampling time. The count value in a sampling time is stored in the
hold value register.
This counter operation is enabled while the soft-gate is ON. When the soft-gate is
OFF, the hold value is cleared to 0.
The setting range of the sampling time is 10 to 1000ms (10ms units).
The count value range is H0000 to HFFFF (16-bit).
Hardware condition
Count input (X000 and X001)
ON/OFF pulse width: 100µs or more (max. 5KHz)
Related registers
SW16: Function selection. Refer to section 8.1.
Function
Register/device
Remarks
Channel 1
Channel 2
X001
SW20
SW23
S248
Count input
X000
SW18
SW22
S240
(Note 2)
Sampling time
Hold value
Soft-gate
Data range: 1 to 100 (Note 1)
Data range: H0000 to HFFFF
Operation is enabled when ON
Note 1) The setting data range of the sampling time is 1 to 100. (10ms multiplier)
Note 2) When both channels are used, X000 and X001 cannot be used as normal
input devices. However, if either one channel is used, the input for unused
channel can be used as normal input devices.
Interrupt assignment
No interrupt function.
Basic Hardware and Function 263
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
8. Special I/O Functions
Operation
Count input
∆T
∆T
∆T
∆T
∆T
∆T
Sampling time
Soft-gate
e
c
b
a
d
c
a
Internal
count value
e
b
d
Hold value
Sample program
(H1403)
In this example, 5123 (H1403) is set in SW16. As a result, the single phase speed-
counter (channel 1 only) is selected.
The sampling time is set as 100ms, because 10 is written in SW18.
While R010 is ON, the soft-gate (S240) is set to ON, and the speed-counter works.
The hold value is stored in SW22.
264 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
8. Special I/O Functions
8.3.3 Quadrature bi-pulse counter
Function
This function counts up or down the quadrature bi-pulse (2-phase pulses whose
phases are shifted 90° each other). Counts up when phase A precedes, and counts
down when phase B precedes. Both rising and falling edges of each phase are
counted. Consequently, 4 times count value against the pulse frequency is obtained.
Phase A
Phase B
Up count
Down count
When the count value reaches the comparison value 1 (or 2), the I/O interrupt
program #1 (or #2) is activated (if the interrupt enable flag for each is ON).
This counter operation is enabled while the soft-gate is ON. The count value is reset to
0 when the soft-gate is changed from ON to OFF. The count value is also reset to 0
when the reset input comes ON.
When the soft-gate is OFF, the count value can be changed by writing the data into
the comparison value 1 (or 2) register and setting the count preset flag 1 (or 2) to ON.
The comparison value 1 and 2 can be changed even when the soft-gate is ON.
The count value range is -2147483648 to 2147483647 (32-bit data).
Hardware condition
Phase A and phase B (X000 and X001)
ON/OFF pulse width: 100µs or more (max. 5KHz)
Reset input (X002)
ON/OFF duration:
Related registers
SW16: Function selection. Refer to section 8.1.
2ms or more
Function
Phase A
Register/device
X000
Remarks
Phase B
X001
Reset input
X002
Comparison value 1
Comparison value 2
Count value
Data range: -2147483648 to 2147483647
SW19⋅SW18
SW21⋅SW20
SW23⋅SW22
S240
Soft-gate
Operation is enabled when ON
Interrupt 1 is enabled when ON
Used to preset the count value
Interrupt 2 is enabled when ON
Used to preset the count value
Interrupt enable 1
Count preset 1
Interrupt enable 2
Count preset 2
S241
S243
S249
S24B
Basic Hardware and Function 265
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
8. Special I/O Functions
Interrupt assignment
Comparison value 1 … I/O interrupt program #1
Comparison value 2 … I/O interrupt program #2
Operation
Up count
Down count
Reset input
Soft-gate
2147483647
Comparison
value 1
Count value
Comparison
value 2
-2147483648
Interrupt
1
1 1
2
266 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
8. Special I/O Functions
Sample program
(H0803)
In this example, 2051 (H0803) is set in SW16. As a result, the quadrature bi-pulse
counter is selected.
When R010 comes ON, the data 150000 is set into the comparison value 1 register
(SW19⋅SW18), and 200000 is set into the comparison value 2 register (SW21⋅SW20).
While R010 is ON, the soft-gate (S240), the interrupt enable flag 1 (S241) and the
interrupt enable flag 2 (S249) are set to ON to enable the counter operation.
The count value is stored in SW23⋅SW22.
When R010 is OFF and R011 comes ON, the count value is preset to the data of
D0101⋅D0100.
Basic Hardware and Function 267
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
8. Special I/O Functions
8.4 Interrupt input function
Function
When the signal state of the interrupt input is changed from OFF to ON (or ON to
OFF), the corresponding I/O interrupt program is activated immediately.
Up to 2 interrupt inputs can be used. The interrupt generation condition can be
selected either rising edge (OFF to ON) or falling edge (ON to OFF) for each input.
The I/O interrupt program #3 is corresponding to the interrupt input 1, and the I/O
interrupt program #4 is corresponding to the interrupt input 2.
Hardware condition
Interrupt input (X002 and X003)
ON/OFF pulse width: 100µs or more
Related registers
SW16: Function selection. Refer to section 8.1.
Interrupt input 1
Interrupt input 2
X002
X003
Interrupt assignment
Interrupt input 1 … I/O interrupt program #3
Interrupt input 2 … I/O interrupt program #4
Operation
Interrupt input 1
Interrupt input 2
Interrupt
3
4
3
4
The above operation example is the case of rising edge setting for both inputs.
268 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
8. Special I/O Functions
Sample program
Main program
(H3045)
I/O interrupt program #3
Interrupt program A
I/O interrupt program #4
Interrupt program B
In this example, 12357 (H3045) is set in SW16. As a result, the interrupt input function
(2 points, rising for both) is selected.
When X002 is changed from OFF to ON, the interrupt program A is executed. When
X003 is changed from OFF to ON, the interrupt program B is executed.
NOTE
Even if the Direct I/O instruction is used in the interrupt program, the
corresponding input state (X002 or X003) cannot be confirmed. Because
the interrupt is generated before internal updating of the input states.
Basic Hardware and Function 269
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
8. Special I/O Functions
8.5 Analog setting function
Function
The value of the analog setting adjuster is converted into a digital value (0 to 1000)
and stored in the SW register. 2 adjusters are provided. (V0 and V1)
The SW register data can be used as timer presets or any parameters for function
instructions.
Related registers
Function
Adjuster V0
Adjuster V1
Register
SW30
SW31
Remarks
Data range: 0 to 1000
Operation
Decrease
Decrease
Increase
Increase
V0
V1
SW30 (0 to 1000)
SW31 (0 to 1000)
Sample program
The above example is a simple flicker circuit of Y020. In this example, the ON/OFF
interval of Y020 can be controlled by the adjuster V0.
270 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
8. Special I/O Functions
8.6 Pulse output function
Function
This function is used to output a variable frequency pulse train. The controllable pulse
frequency is 50 to 5000 Hz (1 Hz units).
The output mode can be selected either CW/CCW or Pulse/Direction (PLS/DIR).
In the CW/CCW mode, CW pulse is output when the frequency setting is positive (50
to 5000), and CCW pulse is output when it is negative (-50 to -5000).
In the PLS/DIR mode, DIR is OFF when the frequency setting is positive (50 to 5000),
and DIR is ON when it is negative (-50 to -5000).
< CW/CCW mode >
CW
CCW
< PLS/DIR mode >
PLS
DIR
In the both modes, pulse output is enabled when the pulse enable flag is ON. While
the pulse enable flag is ON, the pulse frequency can be changed by changing the
frequency setting value. However, the pulse direction (the sign of the frequency
setting) cannot be changed when the pulse enable flag is ON.
This function can be used to control the speed of a stepping motor, etc.
Related registers
SW26: Function selection. Refer to section 8.1.
Function
CW/CCW PLS/DIR
Register/
device
Y020
Remarks
CW pulse
PLS
DIR
CCW pulse
Y021
Pulse enable flag
S270
Output is enabled when ON
Frequency setting register
Frequency setting error flag
SW28
S26F
Data range: -5000 to -50, 50 to 5000
ON at error (reset OFF automatically)
Note) The allowable value range of the frequency setting (SW28) is -5000 to -50 and
50 to 5000. If the value is out of this range or the sign is changed while the
pulse enable flag (S270) is ON, the frequency setting error flag (S26F) comes
ON. (Pulse output operation is continued with previous frequency setting)
Basic Hardware and Function 271
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
8. Special I/O Functions
Operation
Pulse enable
Frequency setting
100
-1000
-300
1000
300
-100
+
1KHz
Frequency
300Hz
100Hz
Pulse output
100Hz
300Hz
1KHz
-
Sample program
In this example, 3 (H0003) is set in SW26. As a result, the CW/CCW mode pulse
output function is selected.
When R000 is ON, the pulse output is started with the frequency designated by
D0100.
If an invalid frequency is designated, the frequency setting error flag (S26F) comes
ON and the pulse enable flag (S270) is turned OFF. Then the pulse output is stopped.
272 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
8. Special I/O Functions
8.7 PWM output function
Function
This function is used to output a variable duty cycle pulse train. The controllable duty
cycle is 0 to 100 % (1 % units).
ON duty
PWM
50%
70%
60%
T
T
T
T = Pulse cycle
The PWM output is enabled when the pulse enable flag is ON. While the pulse enable
flag is ON, the duty cycle (ON duty) can be changed by changing the duty setting
value (0 to 100).
The frequency setting is available in the range of 50 to 5000 Hz (1 Hz units) before
turning ON the pulse enable flag. The frequency changing is not allowed while the
pulse enable is ON.
Note that the minimum ON/OFF pulse duration is 100 µs. Therefore, the controllable
ON duty range is limited depending on the frequency setting as follows. If the ON duty
setting value is not available (within 0 to 100), the pulse width error flag comes ON.
(PWM output operation is continued but the duty cycle is not guaranteed)
Frequency
50 - 100 Hz
200 Hz
1000 Hz
5000 Hz
Cycle time
20 - 10 ms
5 ms
1 ms
200 µs
Available ON duty
0 to 100 %
0, 2 to 98, 100 %
0, 10 to 90, 100 %
0, 50, 100 %
Related registers
SW26: Function selection. Refer to section 8.1.
Function
Register/
device
Y020
Remarks
PWM pulse
Pulse enable flag
S270
Output is enabled when ON
Frequency setting register
ON duty setting register
Pulse width error flag
ON duty setting error flag
Frequency setting error flag
SW28
SW29
S26D
S26E
Data range: 50 to 5000
Data range: 0 to 100
ON at error (reset OFF automatically)
ON at error (reset OFF automatically)
ON at error (reset OFF automatically)
S26F
Note) If the setting value of SW28 or SW29 is out of the allowable range, the
frequency setting error flag (S26F) or the ON duty setting error flag (S26E)
comes ON. (PWM output operation is continued with previous ON duty setting)
Basic Hardware and Function 273
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
8. Special I/O Functions
Operation
Pulse enable
ON duty setting
70
60
10
20
30
70
70%
70%
60%
ON duty
30%
20%
PWM output
10%
Sample program
In this example, 1 (H0001) is set in SW26 and 100 is set in SW28. As a result, 100 Hz
PWM output function is selected.
When R005 is ON, the PWM output is started with the duty cycle designated by
D0200.
If an invalid ON duty is designated, the ON duty setting error flag (S26E) comes ON
and the pulse enable flag (S270) is turned OFF. Then the PWM output is stopped.
274 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
Section 9
Maintenance and Checks
9.1 Precautions during operation, 276
9.2 Daily checks, 277
9.3 Periodic checks, 278
9.4 Maintenance parts, 279
9.5 Battery, 280
Basic Hardware and Function 275
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
9. Maintenance and Checks
9.1 Precautions during operation
When the T1-16S is in operation, you should pay attention to the following items.
(1) The programmer cable can be plugged or unplugged while the T1-16S is in
operation. When you try to do it, do not touch the connector pins. This may cause
malfunction of the T1-16S owing to static electricity.
(2) Do not plug nor unplug the expansion cable during power on. This can cause
damage to the equipment. Furthermore, to avoid malfunction of the T1-16S owing
to static electricity, do not touch the cable ends.
(3) Do not touch any terminals while the T1-16S is in operation, even if the terminals
are not live parts. This may cause malfunction of the T1-16S owing to static
electricity.
(4) Do not touch the expansion connector pins while the T1-16S is in operation. This
may cause malfunction of the T1-16S owing to static electricity.
Fix the expansion connector cover if the expansion connector is not used.
(5) Turn off power when a battery installs and removes.
276 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
9. Maintenance and Checks
9.2 Daily checks
1. Pay special attention during the maintenance work to minimize the risk
of electrical shock.
!
CAUTION
2. Turn off power immediately if the T1-16S or related equipment is
emitting smoke or odor. Operation under such situation can cause fire
or electrical shock.
To maintain the system and to prevent troubles, check the following items on daily
basis.
Item
Status LEDs
Check
Lit when internal 5V is
normal.
Lit when operating
normally.
Corrective measures
If the LEDs are not normal, see
10. Troubleshooting.
PWR
(power)
RUN
FLT (fault)
Not lit when operating
normally.
Mode control
switch
Check that the mode control switch is Turn this switch to R (RUN) side.
in R (RUN) side. Normal operation is
performed when this switch is in R
(RUN) side.
Input LEDs
Lit when the corresponding input is
ON.
• Check that the input terminal
screw is not loose.
• Check that the input terminal
block is not loose.
• Check that the input voltage is
within the specified range.
• Check that the output terminal
screw is not loose.
Output LEDs
Lit when the output is ON and the
corresponding load should operate.
• Check that the output terminal
block is not loose.
• Check that the output voltage
is within the specified range.
Basic Hardware and Function 277
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
9. Maintenance and Checks
9.3 Periodic checks
1. Pay special attention during the maintenance work to minimize the risk
!
CAUTION
of electrical shock.
2. Turn off power immediately if the T1-16S or related equipment is
emitting smoke or odor. Operation under such situation can cause fire
or electrical shock.
Check the T1-16S based on the following items every six months. Also perform
checks when the operating environment is changed.
Item
Check
Criteria
Power supply
Measure the power voltage at the T1- 85 - 132/170 - 264Vac (AC PS)
16S’s power terminals.
Check that the terminal screw is not
loose.
20.4 - 28.8Vdc (DC PS)
Not loose
Check that the power cable is not
damaged.
Not damaged
Installation
condition
Check that the unit is installed
securely.
Not loose, no play
Check that the I/O module is inserted Not loose, no play
securely. (if any)
Check that the expansion rack/unit is
installed securely. (if any)
Not loose, no play
Check that the expansion cable is
connected securely and the cable is
not damaged. (if any)
Not loose, not damaged
Check that the I/O module on the
expansion rack is inserted securely. (if
any)
Not loose, no play
Input/output
Measure the input/output voltage at
the T1-16S’s terminals.
The voltage must be within the
specified range.
Check the input status LEDs.
Check the output status LEDs.
Check that the terminal block is
installed securely.
The LED must light normally.
The LED must light normally.
Not loose, no play
Check that the terminal screw is not
Not loose, not contacting the
loose and the terminal has a sufficient next terminal
distance to the next terminal.
Check that the each I/O wire is not
damaged.
Not damaged
278 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
9. Maintenance and Checks
(Periodic checks - continued)
Item
Check
Criteria
Environment
Check that the temperature, humidity, Must be within the range of
vibration, dust, etc. are within the
specified range.
general specification.
Programming tool Check that the functions of the
programming tool are normal.
Monitoring and other operations
are available.
Check that the connector and cable
are not damaged.
Not damaged
User program
Check that the T1-16S program and
the master program (saved on a floppy
disk, etc.) are the same.
No compare error
9.4 Maintenance parts
To recover from trouble quickly, it is recommended to keep the following spare parts.
Item
T1-16S basic unit
Quantity
1
Remarks
Prepare at least one to minimize the down-time
of the controlled system.
Programming tool
Master program
Expansion rack or
unit (if any)
1
Useful for the troubleshooting procedure.
Saved on a floppy disk, etc.
As required
1
I/O module
One of each type
(if any)
used
Fuse for I/O
One of each type
module (if any)
used
Battery (CR2032)
1
These spare parts should not be stored in high temperature and/or humidity locations.
Basic Hardware and Function 279
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
9. Maintenance and Checks
9.5 Battery
(1) Install
+ side
Insert the battery by an angle of 45°.
(Turn + side into an upside.)
(1) Push the battery horizontal direction.
(2) Push from upside and lock.
(2) Eject
Push the center of the tab by a finger or a pen. Then
the battery will be unlocked.
Remove the battery.
NOTE
1. Turn off power when installing or removing the battery for safety.
2. The battery type is CR2032. Do not use other types of battery. Use of
another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion.
3. Dispose of used battery promptly. Keep away from children. Do not
disassemble and do not dispose of in fire.
280 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
Section 10
Troubleshooting
10.1 Troubleshooting procedure, 282
10.2 Self-diagnostic items, 288
Basic Hardware and Function 281
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
10. Troubleshooting
10.1 Troubleshooting procedure
1. Pay special attention during the troubleshooting to minimize the risk of
!
CAUTION
electrical shock.
2. Turn off power immediately if the T1-16S or related equipment is
emitting smoke or odor. Operation under such situation can cause fire
or electrical shock.
3. Turn off power before removing or replacing units, modules, terminal
blocks or wires. Failure to do so can cause electrical shock or damage
to the T1 and related equipment.
4. Contact Toshiba for repairing if the T1-16S or related equipment is
failed. Toshiba will not guarantee proper operation nor safety for
unauthorized repairing.
If a trouble occurs, determine whether the cause lies in the mechanical side or in the
control system (PLC) side. A problem may cause a secondary problem, therefore, try
to determine the cause of trouble by considering the whole system.
If the problem is found in the T1-16S, check the following points:
PWR (power) LED
Follow the procedure in
10.1.1 Power supply check
Not lit
Not lit
Lit
RUN LED
Lit
Follow the procedure in
10.1.2 CPU check
User program
Follow the procedure in
10.1.3 Program check
Not normal
Normal operation
Input operation
Normal operation
Output operation
Follow the procedure in
10.1.4 Input check
Not normal
Not normal
Follow the procedure in
10.1.5 Output check
Also refer to section 10.1.6 for environmental problem.
282 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
10. Troubleshooting
10.1.1 Power supply check
If the PWR (power) LED is not lit after power on, check the following points.
Check the power connection
Correct
Connection terminals are correct.
The terminal screws are not loose.
The terminal block is installed securely.
Check the power voltage
at the T1-16S’s terminal
85 to 132/170 to 264Vac (50/60 Hz)
or 20.4 to 28.8Vdc (DC power)
Normal
Remove the programmer
port connector
If the PWR LED becomes normal, the
internal 5Vdc can be shorted in the
external connections of this port.
Still unlit
Remove the 24Vdc service
power terminals if it is used
If the PWR LED becomes normal, the
24Vdc service power can be over load.
Still unlit
Remove the I/O modules.
If the PWR LED is still unlit, the T1-16S
basic unit may be faulty. Replace the unit.
Lit
Confirm the internal 5Vdc
current consumption if
I/O module is used.
The 5Vdc capacity for I/O modules is
max. 1.5A.
(Refer to section 2.1.)
Within the limit
Insert the removed option
modules one by one to
pinpoint the faulty card.
Replace the faulty I/O module.
Basic Hardware and Function 283
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
10. Troubleshooting
10.1.2 CPU check
If the PWR (power) LED is lit but the RUN LED is not lit, check the following points.
Check the position of the
If it is not in R (RUN) position, turn the
mode control switch
switch to R (RUN) position.
Check the FLT (fault) LED
If the FLT LED is lit or blinking, the T1-16S
is in the ERROR mode. Confirm the error
message by connecting the
programming
tool. Refer to section 10.2.
Is the RUN LED blinking ?
If it is blinking, the T1-16S is in the HOLD
mode. Check your program
whether the
not used.
HOLD device (S401) is
Connect the programming
tool, and check the T1-16S’s
status
If the T1-16S stays in HALT mode even
when the mode control switch is changed,
the switch may be faulty.
If the communication between the T1-16S
and the programming tool is not possible,
the T1-16S may be faulty.
10.1.3 Program check
Check the user program based on the following points if it is running but the operation
does not work as intended.
(1) Whether duplicated coils are not programmed.
(2) Whether a coil device and a destination of a function instruction are not
overlapping.
(3) Whether the ON/OFF duration of an external input signal is not shorter than the
T1-16S’s scan time.
(4) Whether a register/device, which is used in the main program, is not operated
erroneously in the interrupt program.
NOTE
When you write/modify the program, it is necessary to execute the
EEPROM write operation before turning off power to the T1. Otherwise the
old program stored in the built-in EEPROM will be over-written, and your
program modification will disappear.
284 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
10. Troubleshooting
10.1.4 Input check
If the program is running but the external input signal is not read normally, check the
following points:
Is the input status LED
changed ON/OFF according
to the corresponding input
device operation ?
If not, check the input voltage at the
T1-16S’s input terminals.
If the voltage is not normal, check the input
device and the cable.
If the voltage is normal, the T1-16S’s input
circuit may be faulty.
Yes
Connect the programming
tool, and monitor the
corresponding X device state
in RUN mode
If the monitored X device state is identical
to the state of the input status LED, the
cause may lie in the user program or in the
environment.
Not normal
Check whether the X device
is forced or not
If it is forced, release the force designation
then execute the EEPROM write
operation.
Not forced
Check whether the I/O
allocation table is identical to
the actual I/O configuration
If identical, the T1-16S’s internal circuit or
the input circuit may be faulty.
Not identical
Execute the automatic I/O
allocation, and check whether
the I/O allocation table is now
identical to the actual I/O
configuration
If it becomes identical, execute the
EEPROM write operation.
Still not identical
Is the allocation mismatch for
a specific I/O module?
If so, the card, module or expansion unit
may be faulty. For expansion unit, check
the expansion cable also.
Basic Hardware and Function 285
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
10. Troubleshooting
10.1.5 Output check
If the output status monitored on the programming tool is normal but the external
output device (load) is not operated normally, check the following points:
Is the output status LED
changed ON/OFF according
to the program execution ?
No
Yes
Check the voltage between
the output terminal and its
common terminal.
It should be 0V when the
output is ON, and it should
be the circuit voltage when
the output is OFF.
If it is the circuit voltage at the output is
ON, or if it is 0V at the output is OFF with
the load ON, the T1-16S’s output circuit
may be faulty.
If it is 0V and the load is also OFF, check
the output power and the output cable
connections.
Normal
If it is not normal, check the output cable
connections.
Check the voltage at the load
If it is normal, check the specification of
the load, also check environmental factors.
Check whether the I/O
allocation table is identical to
the actual I/O configuration
If identical, the T1-16S’s internal circuit or
the output circuit may be faulty.
Not identical
Execute the automatic I/O
allocation, and check whether
the I/O allocation table is now
identical to the actual I/O
configuration
If it becomes identical, execute the
EEPROM write operation.
Still not identical
Is the allocation mismatch for
a specific I/O module?
If so, the card, module or expansion unit
may be faulty. For expansion unit, check
the expansion cable also.
286 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
10. Troubleshooting
10.1.6 Environmental problem
If the following improper operations occur in the controlled system, check possible
environmental factors.
(1) If an improper operation occurs synchronously with the operation of I/O devices:
The noise generated at ON/OFF of the output device (load) may be the cause of
the problem. Take necessary measures mentioned in section 3.
(2) If an improper operation occurs synchronously with the operation of surrounding
equipment or high-frequency equipment:
The noise induced in I/O signal lines may be the cause of the problem. The surge
voltage, voltage fluctuations, or differences of grounding potentials may cause
the problem, depending on the power supply system or the grounding system.
Check the operation in accordance with the precautions in section 4. For some
cases, isolation from the ground may lead to the stable operation.
(3) If an improper operation occurs synchronously with the operation of machinery:
The vibration of the equipment may cause the problem. Check that the installation
status of the units and take necessary measures.
(4) If a similar failure is repeated after the unit is replaced:
Check that no metal debris or water drops has been entered into the unit/module.
Apart from the above points, consider climatic conditions. If the ambient temperature
is beyond the specified range, stable operation of the system is not guaranteed.
Basic Hardware and Function 287
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
10. Troubleshooting
10.2 Self-diagnostic items
If an error is detected by the self-diagnostic check of the T1-16S CPU, the error
messages and the related information shown on the following pages will be recorded
in the T1-16S’s event history table. If the error is severe and continuation of operation
is not possible, the T1-16S turns OFF all outputs and stops the operation (ERROR
mode).
The latest 15 error messages are stored in the event history table. This event history
table can be displayed on the programming tool. (Power ON/OFF is also registered)
If the T1-16S has entered into ERROR mode, connect the programming tool to the T1-
16S to confirm the error message in the event history table. This information is
important to recover from a trouble. For the key operations on the programming tool to
display the event history table, refer to the separate manual for the programming tool.
(An example of the event history)
< Event History>
Date
Time
Event
Count
Info 1
Info 2
H0024
Info 3
Mode
1. 98-02-21
2. 98-02-21
3. 98-02-21
4. 98-01-15
5. 98-01-14
6. 98-01-14
16:48:01
15:55:26
12:03:34
09:27:12
19:11:43
10:39:11
I/O no answer
3
1
1
1
1
3
#00-04
RUN Down
INIT.
RUN
INIT.
HALT
System power on
System power off
System power on
System power off
No END/IRET error
M-001
HALT Down
In the event history table, No.1 message indicates the latest event recorded.
Each column shows the following information.
Date: The date when the error has detected (Enhanced model only)
Time: The time when the error has detected (Enhanced model only)
Event: Error message
Count: Number of times the error has detected by retry action
Info n: Related information to the error detected
Mode: T1-16S’s operation mode in which the error has detected (INIT. means the
power-up initialization)
Down: Shows the T1-16S has entered into ERROR mode by the error detected
If the T1-16S is in the ERROR mode, operations to correct the program are not
accepted.
In this case, execute the Error reset operation by the programming tool to return the
HALT mode before starting the correction operation.
288 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
10. Troubleshooting
Error message and related information
Special
device
Meaning and countermeasures
Event
Info 1
Info 2
Info 3
Batt voltage drop
S00F In the power-up initialization, data invalidity
of RAM (back-up area) has been detected.
If retentive registers are used, these validity
are not guaranteed. (No error down)
The register of index modification is other
than RW, T, C and D. (Error down)
S064 The register designated by index
modification has exceeded the allowable
range. That is, out of RW, T, C and D.
(No error down)
Boundary error
Program Address FUN No.
type - in the
block No. block
Check the value of the index register.
S00A The data of built-in calendar LSI is illegal.
(No error down)
Clock-calendar error
Duplicate entry No.
Set the date and time.
(Enhanced model only)
Multiple SUBR instructions which have the
same subroutine number are programmed.
(Error down)
Program Address Entry No.
type -
in the
block No. block
Check the program.
EEPROM BCC error Illegal
BCC
S004 BCC error has been detected in the user
S013 program of the EEPROM. (Error down)
Reload the program and execute EEPROM
write operation again.
EEPROM warning
Number
of excess
writing
S007 The number of times of writing into
EEPROM has exceeded the life (100,000
times). (No error down)
Replace the unit because the data reliability
of the EEPROM will decrease.
I/O bus error
I/O mismatch
Unit No. Data
S005 An abnormality has been detected in I/O
S020 bus checking. (Error down)
Check the expansion cable connection and
I/O module mounting status.
S005 The I/O allocation information and the
S021 actual I/O configuration are not identical.
(Error down)
Unit No. - Register
slot No. No.
Check the I/O allocation and the I/O module
mounting status.
I/O no answer
I/O parity error
Illegal I/O reg
Unit No. - Register
slot No. No.
S005 No response from the T2 I/O module has
S022 been received. (Error down)
Check the I/O allocation, the expansion
cable connection and the T2 I/O module
mounting status.
S005 I/O bus parity error has been detected in
S023 data read/write for T2 I/O modules. (Error
down)
Check the expansion cable connection and
the T2 I/O module mounting status.
S005 The allocated I/O register address exceeds
S021 the limit, 32 words. (Error down)
Check the I/O allocation.
Unit No. - Register
slot No. No.
Unit No. - Register
slot No. No.
Basic Hardware and Function 289
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
10. Troubleshooting
Error message and related information
Event Info 1 Info 2
Illegal inst Program Address
type - in the
Special
device
Meaning and countermeasures
Info 3
S006 An illegal instruction has been detected in
S030 the program. (Error down)
S060 Reload the program and execute EEPROM
write operation again.
block No. block
Illegal sys intrpt
Interrupt Interrupt
address 1 address 2
Unregistered interrupt has occurred. (No
error down)
If the error occurs frequently, replace the
unit.
Invalid Fun inst
Invalid program
Program Address Fun No.
type - in the
block No. block
Program
type -
A function instruction which is not supported
by the T1-16S is programmed. (Error down)
Correct the program.
A basic ladder instruction which is not
supported by the T1-16S is programmed.
(Error down)
block No.
Correct the program.
SUBR instruction is not programmed before
RET instruction. (Error down)
Correct the program.
An abnormality is detected in the program
management information. (Error down)
Reload the program and execute EEPROM
write operation again.
Loop nesting error
Memory full
Program Address
A FOR-NEXT loop is programmed inside
other FOR-NEXT loop. (Error down)
Correct the program.
The program exceeds the executable
memory capacity. (Error down)
Reduce the program steps.
type -
in the
block No. block
No END/IRET error
Program Address
The END instruction is not programmed in
the main program or in the sub-program.
(Error down)
type -
in the
block No. block
Correct the program.
The IRET instruction is not programmed in
the interrupt program. (Error down)
Correct the program.
No RET error
No sub-r entry
Program Address Sub-r No.
The RET instruction is not programmed in
the subroutine program. (Error down)
Correct the program.
The subroutine corresponding to CALL
instruction is not programmed. (Error down)
Correct the program.
type -
in the
block No. block
Program Address Sub-r No.
type -
in the
block No. block
290 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
10. Troubleshooting
Error message and related information
Special
device
Meaning and countermeasures
Event
Operand error
Info 1
Program Address
type - in the
Info 2
Info 3
A register/device which is not supported by
the T1-16S is programmed. (Error down)
Correct the program.
block No. block
The timer or counter register is duplicated in
the program. (Error down)
Correct the program.
The subroutine number programmed with
CALL or SUBR instruction is out of the
range. (Error down)
0 to 255
Correct the program.
Index modification is programmed for
instructions in which the index modification
is not allowed. (Error down)
Correct the program.
Pair inst error
Program Address
The combination is illegal for MCS-MCR,
JCS-JCR or FOR-NEXT instructions. (Error
down)
type -
in the
block No. block
Correct the program.
A MCS-MCR is programmed inside other
MCS-MCR segment. (Error down )
Correct the program.
A JCS-JCR is programmed inside other
JCS-JCR segment. (Error down )
Correct the program.
Peripheral LSI err
Program BCC error
RAM check error
Scan time over
Error
code
S004 CPU hardware error has been detected in
S016 the power-up initialization. (Error down and
programming tool cannot be connected)
Replace the unit if the error remains after
power OFF and ON again.
S006 BCC error has been detected in the user
S030 program in the RAM. (Error down)
If the error remains after power OFF and
ON again, reload the program and execute
EEPROM write operation.
S004 In the power-up initialization, an error has
S012 detected by RAM read/write checking. (Error
down)
Replace the unit if the error remains after
power OFF and ON again.
S006 The scan time has exceeded 200 ms. (Error
S031 down)
Illegal
BCC
Error
address
Error data Test data
Scan time
Correct the program to reduce the scan time
or use WDT instruction to extend the check
time.
Basic Hardware and Function 291
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
10. Troubleshooting
Error message and related information
Special
device
Meaning and countermeasures
Event
Info 1
Error
address
Info 2
Info 3
Sys RAM check err
Error data Test data
S004 In the power-up initialization, an error has
S011 detected by system RAM read/write
checking. (Error down and programming
tool cannot be connected)
Replace the unit if the error remains after
power OFF and ON again.
Sys ROM BCC error Illegal
BCC
S004 BCC error has been detected in the system
S010 program in the ROM. (Error down and
programming tool cannot be connected)
Replace the unit if the error remains after
power OFF and ON again.
System power off
System power on
Power OFF (no error)
Power ON (no error)
Sub-r nesting err
Program Address Sub-r No.
type - in the
The nesting of subroutines exceeds 3
levels.
block No. block
(Error down)
Correct the program.
WD timer error
Address 1 Address 2
S004 The watchdog timer error has occurred.
S01F (Error down)
If the error occurs frequently, replace the
unit.
292 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
Appendix
A.1 List of models and types, 294
A.2 Instruction index, 295
Basic Hardware and Function 293
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
Appendix
A.1 List of models and types
• Basic unit
Model
T1-16S 100 – 240Vac
Power supply Input type RTC/RS-485
Type code
T1-MDR16SS
T1-MDR16SC
Part number
TDR116S6S
TDR116S6C
24Vdc
Yes
No
24Vdc
Yes
No
T1-MDR16SSD TDR116S3S
T1-MDR16SCD TDR116S3C
• I/O module
Description
16 points 24Vdc input
16 points 24Vdc output
8 points 24Vdc input and 8 points 24Vdc output
8 points relay output
1 channel analog input, 0 – 5V/0 - 20mA
Type code
DI116M
Part number
TDI116M∗S
TDO116M∗S
TDD116M∗S
TRO108M∗S
TAD121M∗S
TAD131M∗S
TDA121M∗S
TDA131M∗S
TTC111M∗S
TFR112M∗S
DO116M
DD116M
RO108M
AD121M
AD131M
DA121M
DA131M
TC111M
FR112M
1 channel analog input, ±10V
1 channel analog output, 0 – 20mA
1 channel analog output, ±10V
1 channel thermo couple input, K/E/J
TOSLINE-F10 remote station
• Peripherals
Description
Handy programmer (with 2 m cable for T1/T1S)
T-PDS software (Windows version)
Program storage module
Type code
HP911A
T-PDS Windows TMW33E2SS
RM102
CU111
Part number
THP911A∗S
TRM102∗∗S
TCU111∗∗S
Multi-drop adapter for computer link
• Cable and others
Description
T-PDS cable for T1/T1S, 5m length
HP911A cable for T1/T1S, 2m length (spare parts)
RS-232C connector for computer link
(with 2 m cable)
Type code
Part number
TCJ105∗CS
TCJ102∗CS
TPT16S∗AS
CJ105
CJ102
PT16S
I/O module I/O connector for
DI116M/DO116M/DD116M, soldering type
I/O module I/O connector for
DI116M/DO116M/DD116M, flat cable type
PT15S
PT15F
TPT15S∗AS
TPT15F∗AS
294 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
Appendix
A.2 Instruction index
• Instruction name
1 bit rotate left
1 bit rotate right
1 bit shift left
1 bit shift right
2’s complement
7-segment decode
Absolute value
Addition
173
172
165
164
232
234
231
143
149
156
236
162
228
238
170
237
202
163
218
121
132
139
136
201
155
177
197
196
160
239
209
146
233
147
137
286
284
Exclusive OR
Expanded data transfer
Flip-flop
FOR
Forced coil
Function generator
Greater than
Greater than or equal
Hex to ASCII conversion
Increment
Interrupt return
Invert coil
Invert transfer
Inverter
Jump control reset
Jump control set
Less than
Less than or equal
Lower limit
Master control reset
Master control set
Maximum value
Minimum value
Moving average
Multiplexer
Multiplication
n bit rotate left
n bit rotate right
n bit shift left
158
241
215
205
122
229
178
179
161
154
210
124
138
123
134
134
182
183
225
133
133
226
227
159
176
145
175
174
167
166
118
128
126
206
117
181
130
129
157
127
125
219
199
217
198
168
Addition with carry
AND
ASCII conversion
ASCII to Hex conversion
Average value
BCD conversion
Bi-directional shift register
Binary conversion
Bit count
Bit test
Calendar operation
Coil
Counter
Data exchange
Data transfer
Decode
Decrement
Demultiplexer
Device/register reset
Device/register set
Digital filter
Direct I/O
Disable interrupt
Division
Double-word 2’s complement
Double-word addition
Double-word data transfer
Double-word equal
Double-word greater than
n bit shift right
NC contact
Negative pulse coil
Negative pulse contact
NEXT
NO contact
Not equal
OFF delay timer
ON delay timer
OR
Positive pulse coil
Positive pulse contact
Pre-derivative real PID
Reset carry
Set calendar
Set carry
Shift register
Double-word greater than or equal 285
Double-word less than
Double-word less than or equal
Double-word not equal
Double-word subtraction
Enable interrupt
Encode
288
289
287
148
208
200
135
180
End
Equal
Basic Hardware and Function 295
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
Appendix
Single shot timer
131
245
247
212
213
214
203
207
204
144
150
140
142
141
120
119
152
153
192
190
191
194
195
151
193
216
224
211
Special module data read
Special module data write
Step sequence initialize
Step sequence input
Step sequence output
Subroutine call
Subroutine entry
Subroutine return
Subtraction
Subtraction with carry
Table initialize
Table invert transfer
Table transfer
Transitional contact (falling)
Transitional contact (rising)
Unsigned division
Unsigned double/single division
Unsigned equal
Unsigned greater than
Unsigned greater than or equal
Unsigned less than
Unsigned less than or equal
Unsigned multiplication
Unsigned not equal
Up-down counter
Upper limit
Watchdog timer reset
296 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
Appendix
• Instruction symbol
FG
229
205
161
239
210
134
134
225
159
226
133
133
227
136
176
232
206
138
157
219
245
204
197
199
175
173
174
172
196
198
167
165
166
164
168
131
213
212
214
207
163
140
141
142
130
129
151
152
U/D
U<
U<=
U<>
U=
U>
U>=
UL
WDT
WRITE 247
XCHG
XFER
216
194
195
193
192
190
191
224
211
∗
145
143
154
149
144
155
150
146
182
183
181
180
178
179
234
231
156
236
162
228
202
238
237
203
217
218
132
147
148
188
189
187
186
184
185
201
160
209
153
137
233
177
170
208
200
135
158
215
+
FOR
HTOA
I/O
IRET
JCR
+1
+C
-
-1
-C
/
<
<=
<>
=
>
>=
7SEG
ABS
AND
ASC
ATOH
AVE
BC
BCD
BIN
CALL
CLDN
CLDS
CNT
D+
JCS
LL
MAVE
MAX
MCR
MCS
MIN
MOV
MPX
NEG
NEXT
NOT
OR
PID3
READ
RET
RST
RSTC
RTL
RTL1
RTR
RTR1
SET
139
241
D-
D<
D<=
D<>
D=
SETC
SHL
SHL1
SHR
SHR1
SR
D>
D>=
DEC
DFL
DI
DIV
DMOV
DNEG
DPX
DSR
EI
ENC
END
EOR
F/F
SS
STIN
STIZ
STOT
SUBR
TEST
TINZ
TMOV
TNOT
TOF
TON
U∗
U/
Basic Hardware and Function 297
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6F3B0253
298 T1-16S User’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Industrial Equipment Department
1-1, Shibaura 1-chome, Minato-ku
Tokyo 105-8001, JAPAN
Tel: 03-3457-4900 Fax: 03-5444-9268
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|